Ford Mondeo mk4 car Owner's Manual

FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
All rights reserved.
Part Number: CG3536en 04/2012 20120207134432
Table of Contents
Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................7
Alarm
Principle of Operation..................................46
Arming the alarm...........................................48
Disarming the alarm.....................................48
At a Glance
At a Glance.........................................................11
Steering Wheel
Child Safety
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49
Audio Control..................................................49
Child Seats........................................................22
Booster Seats..................................................23
Child Seat Positioning..................................24
ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27
Child Safety Locks.........................................28
Wipers and Washers
Windscreen Wipers........................................51
Autowipers.........................................................51
Windscreen Washers....................................52
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52
Headlamp Washers.......................................52
Checking the Wiper Blades........................52
Changing the Wiper Blades........................53
Occupant protection
Principle of Operation..................................30
Fastening the seat belts...............................32
Seat belt height adjustment......................32
Seat belt reminder.........................................33
Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33
Disabling the passenger airbag................33
Lighting
Lighting Control..............................................55
Daytime Running Lamps............................56
Autolamps........................................................56
Automatic Main Beam Control.................56
Front Fog Lamps.............................................57
Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58
Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles
With: Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon
Headlamps...................................................58
Headlamp Levelling......................................58
Adaptive Headlamps....................................59
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60
Direction Indicators........................................61
Interior Lamps..................................................61
Removing a Headlamp................................63
Changing a Bulb.............................................64
Bulb Specification Chart.............................70
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................35
Programming the remote control............35
Changing the remote control
battery............................................................35
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................38
Global Opening and Closing.....................40
Keyless Entry.....................................................41
Engine immobiliser
Principle of Operation..................................45
Coded keys.......................................................45
Arming the engine immobiliser................45
1
Table of Contents
Clock..................................................................127
Cigar Lighter....................................................127
Ashtray.............................................................128
Auxiliary Power Points................................128
Cup Holders....................................................129
Glove Box.........................................................129
Storage compartments..............................129
Map Pockets..................................................130
Memory Function.........................................130
Glasses Holder................................................131
CD changer.......................................................131
Auxiliary Input Socket..................................131
USB Port............................................................131
Floor Mats........................................................132
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................72
Exterior Mirrors................................................74
Electric exterior mirrors................................74
Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................75
Blind Spot Monitor.........................................76
Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................79
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................81
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83
Information Displays
General Information.....................................85
Trip Computer.................................................94
Personalised Settings..................................96
Information Messages.................................98
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................133
Ignition Switch...............................................133
Keyless Starting.............................................133
Steering Wheel Lock...................................135
Starting a Petrol Engine.............................136
Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................137
Starting a Diesel Engine.............................137
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................138
Switching Off the Engine...........................138
Engine Block Heater....................................138
Climate Control
Principle of Operation................................108
Air Vents..........................................................108
Manual Climate Control............................109
Automatic Climate Control.........................111
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................113
Auxiliary Heater..............................................114
Electric sunroof..............................................118
Seats
Start-Stop
Sitting in the Correct Position...................121
Manual Seats..................................................121
Power Seats....................................................122
Head Restraints.............................................124
Rear Seats.......................................................124
Heated Seats..................................................125
Ventilated Seats............................................126
Principle of Operation................................140
Using start-stop...........................................140
Eco Mode
Principle of Operation.................................142
Using Eco mode............................................142
Convenience features
Fuel and Refuelling
Sun Shades.....................................................127
Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................127
Safety Precautions.......................................143
Fuel Quality - Petrol....................................143
2
Table of Contents
Fuel Quality - E85........................................143
Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................143
Catalytic Converter......................................144
Fuel filler flap.................................................144
Refuelling........................................................146
Refuelling - E85............................................146
Fuel Consumption.......................................146
Technical Specifications...........................146
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................165
Using Cruise Control....................................165
Adaptive cruise control
(ACC)
Principle of Operation.................................167
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................168
Forward alert function................................172
Transmission
Speed Limiter
Manual Transmission...................................151
Automatic Transmission.............................151
Principle of Operation.................................173
Using the speed limiter...............................173
Brakes
Driver Alert
Principle of Operation.................................154
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................154
Parking Brake.................................................154
Principle of Operation.................................175
Using driver alert...........................................175
Lane Departure Warning
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................177
Using lane departure warning..................177
Principle of Operation.................................155
Using Stability Control................................155
Load Carrying
Hill Start Assist
General Information....................................179
Luggage Anchor Points..............................179
Sliding Loadspace Floor............................180
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182
Luggage Covers.............................................182
Cargo Nets......................................................183
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................184
Dog Guard.......................................................184
Load Retaining Fixtures.............................186
Principle of Operation.................................156
Using hill start assist...................................156
Active suspension
Principle of Operation.................................159
Using active suspension............................159
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation................................160
Parking Aid......................................................160
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................188
Tow Ball...........................................................188
Rear view camera
Principle of Operation.................................162
Rear View Camera........................................162
Driving Hints
Running-In.......................................................192
3
Table of Contents
General Driving Points - Vehicles With:
Sports Suspension..................................192
Cold Weather Precautions........................192
Driving Through Water................................192
Fuse Box Locations.....................................194
Changing a Fuse...........................................195
Fuse Specification Chart...........................196
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE
(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4).............219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4).............................................................219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)
Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)
Diesel...........................................................220
Engine Oil Check..........................................220
Engine Coolant Check...............................220
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................221
Power Steering Fluid Check......................221
Washer Fluid Check.....................................222
Technical Specifications...........................222
Vehicle recovery
Vehicle Care
Towing Points...............................................206
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......206
Cleaning the Exterior..................................225
Cleaning the Interior...................................226
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............226
Roadside Emergencies
First Aid Kit......................................................193
Warning Triangle...........................................193
Fuses
Maintenance
Vehicle battery
General Information...................................208
Opening and Closing the Bonnet..........208
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)..............210
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost
SCTi (Sigma)..............................................211
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L
Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................212
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost
SCTi (MI4)...................................................213
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L
Duratec-HE (MI4)....................................214
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................215
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................216
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................218
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)........................................219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma)........................................................219
Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................227
Changing the Vehicle Battery.................228
Battery connection points........................228
Wheels and Tyres
General Information...................................229
Changing a Road Wheel...........................229
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................234
Tyre Care.........................................................238
Using Winter Tyres......................................238
Using Snow Chains.....................................239
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........239
Technical Specifications..........................240
Vehicle identification
Vehicle Identification Plate......................244
Vehicle Identification Number................245
4
Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications
Compact Disc Player
Loading compact discs.............................265
Track selection.............................................265
Loading the compact disc changer......265
Unloading the compact disc
changer.......................................................266
Compact disc playback............................266
Fast forward/reverse..................................266
Shuffle/random...........................................266
Compact disc track compression..........267
Compact disc track scanning..................267
Ejecting compact discs..............................267
Repeat compact disc tracks...................268
MP3 file playback........................................268
MP3 display options...................................269
Ending compact disc playback..............269
Technical Specifications...........................246
Audio introduction
Important audio information..................250
Audio unit overview
Audio unit overview......................................251
Audio System Security
Security code................................................254
Lost security code.......................................254
Entering a security code............................254
Incorrect security code..............................254
Audio Unit Clock and Date
Displays
Auxiliary input (AUX IN)
socket
Setting the clock and date on the audio
unit................................................................255
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............270
Audio unit operation
Audio Troubleshooting
On/off control...............................................256
Bass/treble control.....................................256
Balance/fade control.................................256
Audio menu control....................................256
Station preset buttons..............................258
Waveband button.......................................258
Autostore control........................................258
Traffic information control.......................259
Station tuning control...............................260
Audio troubleshooting................................271
Telephone
General Information....................................272
Telephone setup...........................................272
Bluetooth setup............................................273
Telephone controls......................................273
Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:
Navigation System..................................274
Using the telephone - Vehicles With:
Navigation System..................................276
Audio unit menus
Automatic volume control.......................262
Digital signal processing (DSP).............262
Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........262
Alternative frequencies.............................263
Regional mode (REG)................................263
News broadcasts.........................................264
Voice control
Principle of Operation................................279
Using voice control......................................279
Audio unit commands...............................280
Telephone commands..............................289
Navigation system commands..............294
5
Table of Contents
Climate control commands....................294
Connectivity
General Information...................................297
Connecting an external device...............298
Connecting an external device - Vehicles
With: Bluetooth.......................................298
Using a USB device....................................299
Using an iPod.................................................301
Appendices
Type approvals.............................................305
Type approvals.............................................305
Type approvals.............................................305
Type approvals............................................306
Electromagnetic compatibility...............307
6
Introduction
Additionally an efficient pollen filter
protects the passengers against allergen
particles in the outdoor air.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about it,
the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
For more information, contact TÜV at
www.tuv.com.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
WARNING
Symbols in this handbook
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instructions highlighted
by the warning symbol.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range, sometimes even before they are
generally available. It may describe options
not fitted to your vehicle.
CAUTION
You risk damaging your vehicle if you
do not follow the instructions
highlighted by the caution symbol.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may be used for different models,
so may appear different to your vehicle.
However, the essential information in the
illustrations is always correct.
Symbols on your vehicle
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
When you see these symbols, read and
follow the relevant instructions in this
handbook before touching or attempting
adjustment of any kind.
This vehicle has received the endorsement
of TÜV, the accredited international testing
organisation, for its allergy-friendly
properties.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
All materials used in the manufacture of
the interior of this vehicle meet strict
requirements of the TÜV TOXPROOF
Criteria Catalogue for Vehicle Interiors by
TÜV Produkt and Umwelt GmbH and are
designed to minimize the risk of allergic
reactions.
Now you can be sure that your Ford
parts are Ford parts
Your Ford has been built to the highest
standards using high quality Ford Original
Parts. As a result, you can enjoy driving it
for many years.
7
Introduction
Should the unexpected occur and a major
part needs replacing, we recommend that
you accept nothing less than Ford Original
Parts.
The use of Ford Original Parts ensures that
your vehicle is repaired to its pre-accident
condition and maintains its maximum
residual value.
Ford Original Parts match Ford's stringent
safety requirements and high standards
of fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply,
they represent the best overall repair value,
including parts and labour costs.
Now it is easier to tell if you have really
been given Ford Original Parts. The Ford
logo is clearly visible on the following parts
if they are Ford Original Parts. If your
vehicle has to be repaired, look for the
clearly visible Ford branding and make sure
that only Ford Original Parts have been
used.
E131722
Bumper and radiator grille
Look for the Ford logo on the
following parts
•
•
Sheet metal
•
•
•
•
Bonnet
Doors
Luggage compartment lid or tailgate
Wing
8
Radiator grille
Front and rear bumper
Introduction
Exterior mirror
E131724
Glass
E131723
•
•
•
Rear window
Side glass
Windscreen
E88507
9
Introduction
Lighting
•
•
Rear lamps
Headlamp
E131725
10
At a Glance
Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive
A
B
C D E
V
U
F
T
G
S
H
R
E87719
11
J
I
Q
P
K
L
O
M
N
At a Glance
Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive
N L
E87720
P
M
J K
O
I
U
H
C
T
D
F
G
B
R
V
Q
E
S
A
Lighting controls. See Lighting Control (page 55).
A
B
Air vents. See Air Vents (page 108).
C
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 61). Telephone control
buttons. See Telephone controls (page 273). Voice control buttons. See Using
voice control (page 279). Lane departure warning control buttons. See Lane
Departure Warning (page 177).
D
Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 49).
E
Instrument cluster. See Gauges (page 79).
F
Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 85).
G
Wiper lever. See Windscreen Wipers (page 51).
H
Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 133).
I
Audio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 251).
I
Navigation unit. See separate handbook.
12
At a Glance
J
Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using Stability Control (page 155).
Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 140).
K
Parking aid switch. See Parking Aid (page 160).
L
Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 60).
M
Passenger airbag deactivation warning lamp. See Disabling the passenger
airbag (page 33).
N
Heated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heated Windows
and Mirrors (page 113).
O
Climate controls. See Manual Climate Control (page 109). See Automatic
Climate Control (page 111).
P
Cigar lighter. See Cigar Lighter (page 127).
Q
Ignition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 133).
R
Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page
165). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 168). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).
S
Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page
49).
T
Horn.
U
Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page
165). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 168). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).
V
Driver knee airbag. See Principle of Operation (page 30).
13
At a Glance
Electric child safety locks
Unlocking the vehicle
E78278
Pull a door handle to unlock all the doors
and the luggage compartment lid and
disarm the alarm.
Locking the vehicle
E124779
See Child Safety Locks (page 28).
Keyless entry
E87384
E78276
Passive locking and unlocking requires a
valid passive key to be located within one
of the three external detection ranges.
E87435
See Keyless Entry (page 41).
14
At a Glance
Adjusting the steering wheel
Autowipers
A
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel
when the vehicle is moving.
2
C
E70315
2
B
A
High sensitivity
B
On
C
Low sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
using the rotary control.
1
See Autowipers (page 51).
E95178
Changing the wiper blades
CAUTION
You can use the service position in
winter to provide easier access to the
wiper blades for freeing them from
snow and ice. The windscreen wipers will
return to their normal position as soon as
you switch on the ignition so make sure
that the outside of the windscreen is free
from snow and ice before you switch on
the ignition.
3
E95179
See Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 49).
15
At a Glance
See Lighting Control (page 55).
Automatic main beam control
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. A manual
override may be necessary if the system
fails to switch the main beam on or off.
The system will automatically switch on
main beam if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. If it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
lamps, or street lighting ahead the system
will switch off main beam before it can
distract other road users. Dipped beams
will remain on.
E85833
See Automatic Main Beam Control
(page 56).
A
E75188
Electric windows
Switch off the ignition and move the wiper
lever to position A within three seconds.
Release the lever when the windscreen
wipers have moved to the service position.
Note: To reduce wind noise or buffeting
when just one window is open, open the
opposite window slightly.
See Power Windows (page 72).
See Changing the Wiper Blades (page
53).
Autolamps
E70719
The headlamps will come on and go off
automatically depending on the ambient
light.
16
At a Glance
Electric folding mirrors
The system displays a yellow indicator
located in the exterior mirrors.
E124736
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).
Information displays
E72623
See Electric exterior mirrors (page 74).
Reverse mirror dipping
Depending on the selected mirror position,
the relevant exterior mirror will dip
whenever you select reverse gear, giving
you a view of the kerb.
E70499
Use the arrow buttons to navigate through
the menus and press OK to make a
selection.
When you first use this feature, the mirrors
will dip to a preset position. You can
programme the degree of dipping.
See Information Displays (page 85).
See Electric exterior mirrors (page 74).
Manual climate control
Blind spot information system
(BLIS)
Cooling the interior quickly
WARNING
Do not use the system as a
replacement for using the side and
rear view mirrors, and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. The
system is not a replacement for careful
driving and is only to be used as an aid.
E71381
17
At a Glance
Heating the interior quickly
Defrosting and demisting the
windscreen
E71377
E71382
Recommended settings for cooling
See Manual Climate Control (page 109).
Automatic climate control
E131534
E91391
Open the centre and side air vents.
Direct the centre air vents upwards and the
side air vents toward the side windows.
See Automatic Climate Control (page
111).
Recommended settings for heating
Engine idle speed after starting
The engine may idle at a higher speed than
normal immediately after starting from
cold.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine
(page 133).
E131535
Keyless starting
Close the centre air vents and open the
side air vents.
Direct the side air vents toward the side
windows.
E85766
Press the start button.
18
At a Glance
Fuel filler flap
Stopping the engine when the vehicle
is moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not be locked, but higher
effort will be required. When the ignition is
switched off some electrical circuits,
warning lamps and indicators may also be
OFF.
E86613
Press and hold the start button for two
seconds, or press three times within three
seconds.
Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fully
until it engages.
See Keyless Starting (page 133).
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)
A
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The DPF
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after DPF regeneration, and
after you have switched the engine off.
This is a potential fire hazard.
E139202
Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including
the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel pipe
opening.
See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 138).
WARNING
We recommend that you remove the
fuel nozzle slowly to allow any
residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds
before removing the fuel nozzle.
19
At a Glance
E119081
Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.
S
See Fuel filler flap (page 144).
Manual transmission
E80836
Selecting reverse gear
P
Park
R
Reverse
N
Neutral
D
Drive
S
Manual shifting and sport mode
See Automatic Transmission (page
151).
Rear view camera
E99067
WARNING
On some vehicles it is necessary to raise
the collar whilst selecting reverse gear.
The camera does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
See Manual Transmission (page 151).
Automatic transmission
The camera is a visual aid for use when
reversing.
Note: Do not press the brake pedal when
removing the key from the ignition switch.
Selector lever positions
WARNING
Apply the brakes before moving the
selector lever and keep them applied
until you are ready to move off.
20
At a Glance
Activate the system using the switches on
the indicator stalk.
A
B
E131360
E99105
A
System on
B
System off
See Lane Departure Warning (page 177).
See Rear view camera (page 162).
Towing the vehicle on four wheels
Speed limiter
CAUTION
The system allows you to set a speed, to
which the vehicle then becomes limited.
For certain engine and transmission
combinations, it is recommended not
to tow the vehicle with the drive
wheels on the ground.
See Speed Limiter (page 173).
Driver alert
WARNING
See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 206).
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
The system calculates an alertness score
which can be displayed on the information
display. If the system detects that you are
becoming drowsy or there is deterioration
in your driving style then warnings will be
issued.
See Driver Alert (page 175).
Lane departure warning
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
21
Child Safety
CHILD SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not leave unattended children in
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved in
an accident, have the child restraints
checked by properly trained
technicians.
Note: Mandatory use of child restraints
varies from country to country.
E133140
Only child restraints certified to
ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested
and approved for use in your vehicle. A
choice of these are available from your
Dealer.
Child restraints for different mass
groups
Use the correct child restraint as follows:
Baby safety seat
E68916
WARNINGS
Secure children that are less than
150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in a
suitable, approved child restraint, in
the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an air bag in front
of it!
Read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when you are fitting a
child restraint.
E68918
Secure children that weigh less than 13
kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facing
baby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rear
seat.
Do not modify child restraints in any
way.
Do not hold a child on your lap when
the vehicle is moving.
22
Child Safety
Child safety seat
CAUTION
When using a child seat on a rear seat,
make sure that the child seat rests
tightly against the vehicle seat. It may
be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Head Restraints (page 124).
Booster seat (Group 2)
E68920
Secure children that weigh between 13 and
18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a child
safety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.
BOOSTER SEATS
E70710
WARNINGS
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with only the lap
strap of the seat belt.
We recommend that you use a booster
seat that combines a cushion with a
backrest instead of a booster cushion only.
The raised seating position will allow you
to position the shoulder strap of the adult
seat belt over the centre of your child’s
shoulder and the lap strap tightly across
its hips.
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with a seat belt that
is slack or twisted.
Do not put the seat belt under your
child’s arm or behind its back.
Do not use pillows, books or towels
to boost your child’s height.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
Secure children that weigh more
than 15 kilograms (33 pounds) but
are less than 150 centimetres (59
inches) tall in a booster seat or a booster
cushion.
23
Child Safety
Booster cushion (Group 3)
WARNINGS
Original text according to ECE
R94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not use
a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in front of
it!
When using a child restraint with a
support leg on a second row seat,
make sure the support leg rests
securely on the floor.
When using a forward facing child
seat on a second row seat, always
remove the head restraint from that
seat. See Head Restraints (page 124).
When using a child seat with a seat
belt, make sure that the seat belt is
not slack or twisted.
E68924
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
Note: When using a child seat on a front
seat, always adjust the front passenger seat
to its fully rearwards position. If it proves
difficult to tighten the lap section of the seat
belt without slack remaining, adjust the
seatback to the fully upright position and
raise the height of the seat. See Seats
(page 121).
WARNINGS
Please consult your Dealer for the
latest details relating to Ford
recommended child seats.
24
Child Safety
Mass group categories
Seating positions
0
0+
Up to 10 kg Up to 13 kg
1
2
3
9 - 18 kg
15 - 25 kg
22 - 36 kg
Front passenger seat
with airbag ON
X
X
UF¹
UF¹
UF¹
Front passenger seat
with airbag OFF
U¹
U¹
U¹
U¹
U¹
Rear seats
U
U
U
U
U
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.
U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.
U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However,
we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, in the rear
seat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in this
mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved
child seat, in the rear seat.
ISOFIX child seats
Mass group categories
0+
1
Rear facing
Forward facing
Up to 13 kg
9 - 18 kg
Seating positions
Front seat
Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
Rear outboard seat ISOFIX
Size class
C, D, E
Seat type
IL
**
25
*
A, B, B1, C, D
***
IL, IUF
*
Child Safety
Mass group categories
0+
1
Rear facing
Forward facing
Up to 13 kg
9 - 18 kg
Seating positions
Rear centre seat
Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category.
Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal category
approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.
*
The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systems
is defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX
child restraints.
**
At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax
Romer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford
recommended child seats.
***
At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer
Duo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child
seats.
26
Child Safety
ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS
WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device when
using the ISOFIX system. We
recommend the use of a top tether
or support leg.
Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchor
points that accommodate universally
approved ISOFIX child restraints.
The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid
attachment arms on the child restraint that
attach to anchor points on the outboard
rear seats, where the cushion and backrest
meet. Tether anchor points are fitted
behind the outboard rear seats for child
restraints with a top tether.
E93616
Top tether anchor points
E93514
Attaching a child seat with top
tethers
WARNING
Do not attach a tether strap to
anything other than the correct
tether anchor point.
E87146
Note: Where applicable, remove the
luggage cover to ease installation. See
Luggage Covers (page 182).
Note: On 4-door vehicles, make sure the
tether strap tightening mechanism remains
accessible when the seatback is fully
engaged.
27
Child Safety
E87591
E87145
1.
5. Push the child seat back firmly to
engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
6. Tighten the tether strap in line with the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Place the child seat on the back seat
cushion and fold the relevant seatback
forwards. See Rear Seats (page 124).
2. Remove the head restraint. See Head
Restraints (page 124).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
Make sure the top tether strap is not
slack or twisted and is properly
located on the anchor point.
WARNING
You cannot open the doors from
inside if you have put the child safety
locks on.
3. Route the tether strap to the anchor
point.
Manual child safety locks
WARNING
Make sure that the seatback is
secure and fully engaged in the
catch.
Note: On vehicles with keyless entry, use
the spare key. See Keyless Entry (page
41).
4. Push the seatback to the upright
position.
28
Child Safety
E78298
E124779
Left-hand side
Turn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-hand side
Turn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwise
to unlock.
Electric child safety locks
Note: Pressing the switch will also disable
the rear electric window switches.
29
Occupant protection
Driver and front passenger airbags
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Airbags
WARNINGS
Do not modify the front of your
vehicle in any way. This could
adversely affect deployment of the
airbags.
Original text according to ECE
R94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not use
a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
E74302
Wear a seat belt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seat belt properly, can it hold you in a
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 121).
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal collisions
or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from
the left or the right. The airbags will inflate
within a few thousandths of a second and
deflate on contact with the occupants,
thus cushioning forward body movement.
During minor frontal collisions, overturns,
rear collisions and side collisions, the driver
and front passenger airbags will not
deploy.
Have repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and
seat belts carried out by a properly
trained technician.
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Driver knee airbag
CAUTION
Do not poke sharp objects into areas
where airbags are fitted. This could
damage and adversely affect
deployment of the airbags.
Do not attempt to open the driver
knee airbag cover.
The driver knee airbag will deploy during
frontal collisions or collisions that are up
to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The
airbag will inflate within a few thousandths
of a second and deflate on contact with
the occupants, thus providing a cushion
between the driver’s knees and the steering
column. During overturns, rear collisions
and side collisions, the knee airbag will not
deploy.
Use seat covers designed for seats
with side airbags. Have these fitted
by a properly trained technician.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
cloth.
For item location: See At a Glance (page
11).
30
Occupant protection
Note: The knee airbag has a lower
deployment threshold than the front
airbags. During a minor collision, it is
possible that only the knee airbag deploys.
Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trim
panels over the front and rear side
windows. Moulded badges in the B-pillar
trim panels indicate that curtain airbags
are fitted to your vehicle.
Side airbags
The curtain airbags will deploy during
significant lateral collisions. The airbag will
inflate within a few thousandths of a
second and deflate on contact with the
occupants, thus providing protection for
the head. During minor lateral collisions,
front collisions, rear collisions, or overturns
the curtain airbags will not deploy.
Seat belts
WARNINGS
Wear a seat belt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seat belt properly, can it hold you in a
position to achieve its optimum effect. See
Sitting in the Correct Position (page
121).
E72658
Side airbags are fitted inside the seatback
of the front seats. A label indicates that
side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
The side airbags will deploy during
significant lateral collisions. The airbags
will inflate within a few thousandths of a
second and deflate on contact with the
occupants, thus providing protection for
the chest and shoulder areas. During minor
lateral collisions, overturns, front collisions
and rear collisions, the side airbags will not
deploy.
Never use a seat belt for more than
one person.
Use the correct buckle for each seat
belt.
Do not use a seat belt that is slack
or twisted.
Curtain airbags
Do not wear thick clothing. The seat
belt must fit tightly around your body
to achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of the
seat belt over the centre of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
E75004
31
Occupant protection
The driver and front passenger seat belt
retractors are fitted with a seat belt
pretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners have
a lower deployment threshold than the
airbags. During minor collisions, it is
possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will deploy.
Status after a collision
WARNING
Seat belts subjected to strain, as a
result of an accident, should be
renewed and the anchorages
checked by a properly trained technician.
E85817
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you
pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt. Let it retract completely
and smoothly.
WARNING
Insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear a distinct click. You have
not fastened the seat belt properly
if you do not hear a click.
SEAT BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
E74124
E87511
Note: Lifting the slider slightly while
pressing the locking button makes it easier
to release the locking mechanism.
To raise or lower, press the locking button
on the adjuster and move as necessary.
32
Occupant protection
Position the lap strap comfortably across
your hips and low beneath your pregnant
abdomen. Position the shoulder strap
between your breasts, above and to the
side of your pregnant abdomen.
SEAT BELT REMINDER
WARNING
The occupant protection system will
only provide optimum protection
when you use the seat belt properly.
DISABLING THE PASSENGER
AIRBAG
The seat belt reminder warning
lamp illuminates and an audible
warning will sound if the driver's
or front seat passenger's seat belt has not
been fastened and the vehicle exceeds a
relatively low speed. It will also illuminate
if the driver's or front seat passenger's seat
belt is unfastened when the vehicle is
moving. The audible warning and warning
lamp will go off after seven minutes.
WARNING
Make sure that the passenger airbag
is disabled when using a rearward
facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
Deactivating the seat belt
reminder
See your dealer.
USING SEAT BELTS DURING
PREGNANCY
E71313
Fitting the passenger airbag
deactivation switch
WARNING
If you need to fit a child restraint on
a seat protected by an operational
airbag in front of it, have a passenger
airbag deactivation switch fitted. Ask your
dealer for further information.
E68587
WARNING
Note: The key switch is located in the glove
compartment with an airbag deactivation
lamp in the instrument panel.
Position the seat belt correctly for
your safety and that of your unborn
child. Do not use only the lap strap
or the shoulder strap.
33
Occupant protection
If the airbag warning lamp illuminates or
flashes when you are driving, this indicates
a malfunction. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 81). Remove the child
restraint and have the system checked
immediately.
Disabling the passenger airbag
A
B
E71312
A
Disabled
B
Enabled
Turn the switch to position A.
When you switch the ignition on, check that
the passenger airbag deactivation warning
lamp illuminates.
Enabling the passenger airbag
WARNING
Make sure that the passenger airbag
is enabled when you are not using a
child restraint on the front passenger
seat.
Turn the switch to position B.
34
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Further remote controls may be
programmed at this stage.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
4. Press any button on each additional
remote control within 10 seconds of
each other.
CAUTIONS
The radio frequency used by your
remote control can also be used by
other short distance radio
transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
remote controls and alarm systems). If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Reprogramming the unlocking
function
Note: When you press the unlock button
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver’s door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote key simultaneously for at
least four seconds with the ignition off. The
direction indicators will flash twice to
confirm the change.
Check your vehicle is locked before
leaving it unattended. This will
safeguard against any potential
malicious frequency blocking.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Note: You could unlock the doors if you
press the buttons on the remote control
unintentionally.
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY
The operating range between your remote
control and your vehicle varies depending
on the environment.
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
regarding recycling.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
You can programme a maximum of eight
remote controls to use with your vehicle
(including any supplied with your vehicle).
Remote control with a folding key
blade
Programming a new remote
control
1. Insert the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the key from position 0 to II and
then back to 0 four times within six
seconds.
3. Leave the key in position 0 and press
any button on the remote control
within 10 seconds. You will receive
confirmation via a chime or LED that
programming has been successful.
1
2
E128809
35
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote control without a folding
key blade
1.
Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
2
1
1
E87964
1.
Press and hold the pushbuttons on the
edges to release the cover. Carefully
remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
E128810
3. Carefully remove the cover.
3
E128811
4. Turn the remote control over to remove
the battery.
5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with
the + facing upwards.
6. Replace the battery cover.
E105362
3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in the
position shown to separate the two
halves of the remote control.
4
E119190
36
Keys and Remote Controls
4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in the
position shown to open the remote
control.
5
E125860
CAUTION
Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
5. Carefully prise out the battery with the
screwdriver.
6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with
the + facing downwards.
7. Assemble the two halves of the remote
control.
8. Install the key blade.
37
Locks
Locking and unlocking
confirmation
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
CAUTION
When you unlock the doors, the direction
indicators will flash once.
Check your vehicle is locked before
leaving it unattended.
When you lock the doors, the direction
indicators will flash twice.
Central locking
Locking and unlocking the doors
with the key
You can only centrally lock the doors if they
are all closed.
Note: The driver’s door can be unlocked
with the key. This needs to be used if the
remote control or keyless entry is not
functioning.
B
B
Note: Central locking also locks and
unlocks the fuel filler flap.
A
A
Double locking
WARNING
Do not activate double locking when
persons or animals are inside the
vehicle. You will not be able to
unlock the doors from the inside if you have
double locked them.
E71962
A
Unlock
B
Lock
Double locking the doors with the
key
Turn the key to the lock position twice
within three seconds to double lock the
doors.
E71961
Double locking is a theft protection feature
that prevents someone from opening the
doors from the inside. You can only double
lock the doors if they are all closed.
38
Locks
Locking and unlocking the doors
from inside
Locking and unlocking the doors
and the luggage compartment lid
with the remote control
Driver's door
A
A
B
C
E87379
B
A
Unlock
B
Lock
C
Luggage compartment lid unlock
(press twice)
E71958
Locking the doors and the luggage
compartment lid with the remote
control
A
Lock all doors
B
Unlock all doors
Press button B once.
Front and rear passenger doors
Double locking the doors and the
luggage compartment lid with the
remote control
Press button B twice within three seconds.
E98653
To lock the front and rear passenger doors
individually, press the button and close the
door when leaving the vehicle.
39
Locks
Luggage compartment lid
Estate
Opening the luggage compartment lid
with the remote control
Press button C on the remote control twice
within three seconds.
Closing the luggage compartment lid
4-door
E89133
A recessed grip is incorporated inside the
luggage compartment lid to facilitate
closing.
Automatic relocking
The doors will relock automatically if you
do not open a door within 45 seconds of
unlocking the doors with the remote
control. The door locks and the alarm will
return to their previous state.
E89131
5-door
Reprogramming the unlocking
function
The unlocking function may be
reprogrammed so that only the driver’s
door is unlocked. See Programming the
remote control (page 35).
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can also operate the electric windows
with the ignition off via the global opening
and global closing function.
E89132
Note: Global closing will only operate if you
have set the memory correctly for each
window. See Power Windows (page 72).
40
Locks
Global opening
To close all the windows, press and hold
the lock button for at least three seconds.
Press any button again to stop the closing
function. The anti-trap function is also
active during global closing.
Vehicles with keyless entry
E71955
To open all the windows, press and hold
the unlock button for at least three
seconds. Press either the lock or the
unlock button again to stop the opening
function.
E87384
WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
In an emergency, press the button
on the driver’s door handle to stop.
Global closing
Vehicles without keyless entry
Note: Global closing can be activated using
the button on the driver’s door handle.
Global opening and closing can also be
activated using the buttons on the passive
key.
WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
In an emergency, press a button
immediately to stop.
To close all the windows, press and hold
the button on the driver’s door handle for
at least two seconds. The anti-trap
function is also active during global closing.
KEYLESS ENTRY
General information
WARNING
The keyless entry system may not
function if the key is close to metal
objects or electronic devices such as
mobile phones.
E71956
41
Locks
Locking the vehicle
Note: If the door handles are pulled
repeatedly during a short period of time
without the presence of a valid passive key,
the system will become inoperable for 30
seconds.
WARNING
The vehicle does not lock itself
automatically. If no locking button is
pressed, the vehicle will remain
unlocked.
The passive entry system will not function
if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The passive key battery is flat.
Note: The ignition will automatically switch
off when you lock your vehicle from the
outside. This is to prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging.
Note: If the passive entry system does not
function, you will need to use the key blade
to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Note: If locking from the luggage
compartment lid, the passive key must be
within the luggage compartment lid
detection range.
The keyless system allows the driver to
operate the vehicle without the use of a
key or remote control.
E78276
Passive locking and unlocking requires a
valid passive key to be located within one
of the three external detection ranges.
These are located approximately one and
a half metres from the driver and front
passenger door handles and the luggage
compartment lid.
E87384
Passive key
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked
with the passive key. The passive key can
also be used as a remote control. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 38).
E87435
Locking buttons are located on each of the
front doors and the luggage compartment
lid.
42
Locks
To activate central locking and arm the
alarm:
• Press a locking button once.
To activate double locking, to arm the
alarm and the interior sensors:
• Press a locking button twice within
three seconds.
Note: Once activated, the vehicle will
remain locked for approximately three
seconds. This is to allow you to pull a door
handle and check if the vehicle is locked.
When the delay period is over, the doors can
be opened again, provided the passive key
is within the respective detection range.
E78278
Pull one of the door handles or the luggage
compartment lid handle.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door.
Luggage compartment lid
One long flash of the direction indicators
confirms that all the doors, the luggage
compartment lid and the fuel filler flap
have been unlocked and that the alarm
has been disarmed.
Note: The luggage compartment lid cannot
be closed and will pop back up if the passive
key is located inside the luggage
compartment.
Note: If a second valid passive key is
located within the luggage compartment
lid detection range, the luggage
compartment lid can be closed.
Unlocking only the driver's door
If the unlocking function is reprogrammed
so that only the driver’s door is unlocked (
See Keys and Remote Controls (page
35). ), note the following:
Unlocking the vehicle
Note: If the vehicle remains locked for
longer than five days, the system will enter
an energy-saving mode. This is to reduce
the discharge of the vehicle battery. When
the vehicle is unlocked while in this mode,
the reaction time of the system may be a
little longer than normal. Unlocking the
vehicle once will deactivate the
energy-saving mode.
If the driver’s door is the first door which is
opened, the other doors and the luggage
compartment lid will remain locked. Doors
can be unlocked individually by pulling the
interior door handles on those doors.
If the front passenger door or one of the
rear doors is the first door which is opened,
all the doors and the luggage
compartment lid will be unlocked.
Disabled keys
Any keys left inside the vehicle interior
when it is locked will be disabled.
A disabled key cannot be used to turn the
ignition on or start the engine.
In order to use these passive keys again,
they have to be enabled.
43
Locks
To enable all your passive keys, unlock the
vehicle using a passive key or the remote
control unlocking function.
All passive keys will then be enabled if the
ignition is turned on or the vehicle is started
using a valid key.
Locking and unlocking the doors
with the key blade
2
1
E87964
1
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade and insert it into
the lock.
44
Engine immobiliser
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, this indicates a
malfunction. The message Immobiliser
active will appear in the information
display when you switch on the ignition.
Have the immobiliser checked
immediately.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The engine immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents someone from
starting the engine with an incorrectly
coded key.
CODED KEYS
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognising your key as a valid one.
Note: Have all of your remaining keys
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Ask
your dealer for further information. Have
replacement keys recoded together with
your existing keys.
If you lose a key, you can obtain a
replacement from your Ford Dealer. If
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the
original keys. You can also obtain
additional keys from your Ford Dealer.
ARMING THE ENGINE
IMMOBILISER
The engine immobiliser is armed
automatically a short time after you have
switched the ignition off.
DISARMING THE ENGINE
IMMOBILISER
The engine immobiliser is disarmed
automatically when you switch the ignition
on with a correctly coded key.
If the message Immobiliser active
appears in the information display, your
key has not been recognised. Remove the
key and try again.
45
Alarm
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of
the following alarm systems:
The sensors must not be covered up.
Do not activate the alarm with full
guard if any persons, animals or other
moving objects are inside the vehicle.
•
•
•
The sensors act as a deterrent against
unauthorised intrusion by sensing any
movement within the vehicle.
Alarm system
•
Perimeter alarm.
Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
Category one alarm with interior
sensors and battery back-up sounder.
Category one alarm with interior
sensors, battery back-up sounder and
tilt sensors.
Battery back-up sounder
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorised access to your vehicle
through the doors and the bonnet. It also
protects the audio unit.
The battery back-up sounder is an extra
alarm system which will sound a siren
when the alarm is triggered. It is armed
directly when you lock the vehicle. The
sounder has its own battery and will sound
an alarm siren even if someone
disconnects the vehicle battery or the
battery back-up sounder itself.
Interior sensors
Tilt sensors
Vehicles without overhead console
The tilt sensors detect if someone
attempts to steal a wheel or tow the
vehicle away by sensing changes in the
inclination of the vehicle.
Perimeter alarm
E71401
Note: When travelling on a ferry with the
alarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensors by
selecting reduced guard. This will prevent
the alarm from being triggered by the
movement.
Vehicles with overhead console
Triggering the alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
•
•
•
E131656
•
46
If someone opens a door, the tailgate
or the bonnet without a valid key or
remote control.
If someone removes the audio or
navigation system.
If the ignition is turned to position I, II
or III without a valid key.
If the interior sensors detect movement
within the vehicle.
Alarm
•
•
On vehicles with a battery back-up
sounder, if someone disconnects the
vehicle battery or the battery back-up
sounder itself.
If the tilt sensors detect a change in the
inclination of the vehicle.
If you select Ask on Exit, the message
Reduced guard? appears in the
instrument cluster display each time you
switch the ignition off.
If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced
guard, press the OK button when this
message appears.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will
sound for 30 seconds and the hazard
warning flasher will flash for five minutes.
If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard,
leave the vehicle without pressing the OK
button.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above will trigger the alarm again.
Selecting full or reduced guard
Full and reduced guard
Note: Selecting Reduced does not set the
alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets
it to reduced guard only for the current
ignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarm
to reduced guard, select Ask on Exit.
Full guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior and tilt sensors
are activated when you arm the alarm.
Note: This may result in false alarms if
animals or moving objects are inside the
vehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors, when
travelling on a ferry.
Note: False alarms can also be triggered
by the auxiliary heater. See Auxiliary
Heater (page 114). If you are using the
auxiliary heater, direct the air flow towards
the footwell.
E70499
Reduced guard
In reduced guard, the interior and tilt
sensors are deactivated when you arm the
alarm.
Alarm
Full Guard
Reduced
Ask on Exit
Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
guard for the current ignition cycle only. The
next time you switch on the ignition, the
alarm will be reset to full guard.
Ask on Exit
You can set the information display to ask
you each time which level of guard you
wish to set.
E74509
47
Alarm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Vehicles with keyless entry
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Alarm and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Reduced or Full guard. If
you prefer to be asked each time you
switch off the ignition, select Ask on
Exit.
Press the OK button to confirm the
selection.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. To return to the trip computer
display directly, hold the left arrow
button pressed.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door for
keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 41).
Perimeter alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching the ignition on, or
unlocking the doors or the luggage
compartment lid with the remote control.
Category one alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching the ignition on
within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors
or the luggage compartment lid with the
remote control.
Information messages
See Information Messages (page 98).
ARMING THE ALARM
To arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. See
Locks (page 38).
DISARMING THE ALARM
Vehicles without keyless entry
Perimeter alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching the
ignition on with a correctly coded key, or
unlocking the doors or the luggage
compartment lid with the remote control.
Category one alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching the
ignition on with a correctly coded key
within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors
or the luggage compartment lid with the
remote control.
48
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Make sure that you fully engage the
locking lever when returning it to its
original position.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel
when the vehicle is moving.
AUDIO CONTROL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 121).
A
E
2
B
D
2
C
E72288
1
E95178
A
Volume up
B
Seek up
C
Volume down
D
Seek down
E
Mode
Mode
Press and hold the mode button to select
the audio source.
Press the mode button to:
• tune the radio to the next preset
station
• play the next CD
• play the other side of a cassette tape
• accept an incoming telephone call.
• end a telephone call.
3
E95179
49
Steering Wheel
Seek
Press a seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band
• play the next or the previous CD track
• fast forward or rewind the cassette
tape.
Press and hold a seek button to:
• tune the radio up or down the
frequency band
• seek through a CD track.
50
Wipers and Washers
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
CAUTIONS
Replace the wiper blades as soon as
they begin to leave bands of water
and smears. If you do not replace
them, the rain sensor will continue to
detect water on the windscreen and the
wipers will operate, even though the
majority of the windscreen is dry.
D
C
B
Fully defrost the windscreen in icy
conditions before you switch
autowipers on.
Switch autowipers off before you
enter a car wash.
A
E70696
A
Single wipe
B
Intermittent wipe
C
Normal wipe
D
High speed wipe
A
B
Intermittent wipe
A
A
Short wipe interval
B
Intermittent wipe
C
Long wipe interval
A
High sensitivity
B
On
C
Low sensitivity
If you switch autowipers on, the wipers will
not cycle until water is detected on the
windscreen. The rain sensor will then
continuously measure the amount of water
on the windscreen and adjust the speed
of the wipers automatically.
C
E70315
C
E70315
B
Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
using the rotary control. With low
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a lot of water on the
windscreen. With high sensitivity, the
wipers will operate if the sensor detects a
small amount of water on the windscreen.
AUTOWIPERS
CAUTIONS
Do not switch autowipers on in dry
weather conditions. The rain sensor
is very sensitive and the wipers may
operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the
windscreen.
51
Wipers and Washers
WINDSCREEN WASHERS
WARNING
Do not operate the windscreen
washers for more than 10 seconds
or when the reservoir is empty.
E70777
Note: The washer jets are heated when the
ignition is on.
Pull the lever fully towards the steering
wheel and hold it to operate the washer.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
The headlamp washers will operate with
the windscreen washers when the
headlamps are on.
E70776
Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoir
emptying quickly, the headlamp washers
will not operate every time that you use the
windscreen washers.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
Intermittent wipe
E70777
Reverse gear wipe
The rear window wiper will operate
automatically when you select reverse gear
if the wiper lever is in position B, C or D.
Washer
E66644
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
WARNING
Do not operate the rear window
washer for more than 10 seconds or
when the reservoir is empty.
Clean the wiper blade lips with water
applied with a soft sponge.
52
Wipers and Washers
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Set the windscreen wipers in the service
position and lift the wiper arms.
Windscreen wiper blades
2
CAUTIONS
Set the windscreen wipers in the
service position to change the wiper
blades.
You can use the service position in
winter to provide easier access to the
wiper blades for freeing them from
snow and ice. Make sure that the outside
of the windscreen is free from snow and
ice before using the wipers.
1
E72899
1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Service position
3. Install in the reverse order.
Rear window wiper blades
Changing the rear window wiper blades
- Estate
1.
Lift the wiper arm.
3
4
E85833
2
E86456
A
2. Position the wiper blade at right angles
to the wiper arm.
3. Disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
E75188
Switch off the ignition and move the wiper
lever to position A within three seconds.
Release the lever when the windscreen
wipers have moved to the service position.
53
Wipers and Washers
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Changing the rear window wiper blades
- 5-door
1.
Lift the wiper arm.
3
2
E86457
2. Press the locking button.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
4. Install in the reverse order.
54
Lighting
One side
LIGHTING CONTROL
A
Lighting control positions
A
B
C
B
E75505
A
Right-hand side
B
Left-hand side
Main and dipped beam
E70718
A
Off
B
Side and tail lamps
C
Headlamps
E70725
Parking lamps
Pull the lever fully towards the steering
wheel to switch between main and dipped
beam.
CAUTION
Prolonged use of the parking lamps
will discharge the battery.
Headlamp flasher
Switch off the ignition.
Pull the lever slightly towards the steering
wheel.
Both sides
Home safe lighting
Set the lighting control to position B.
Switch the ignition off and pull the
direction indicator lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlamps
on. You will hear a short tone. The
headlamps will go off automatically after
three minutes with any door open, or 30
seconds after the last door has been
closed.
55
Lighting
With all doors closed, but within the 30
second delay, opening any door will result
in the three minute timer starting again.
WARNINGS
Do not use the system in fog.
The home safe lights can be cancelled by
either pulling the direction indicator lever
towards the steering wheel again or by
turning the ignition switch on.
CAUTIONS
In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. A
manual override may be necessary in
these cases.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
Reflective road signs may be detected
as oncoming traffic and the
headlamps may be switched to
dipped beam.
The lamps will illuminate when the ignition
is on.
AUTOLAMPS
If the lights of oncoming vehicles are
hidden by obstacles (for example
guard rails) the system may not
deactivate the main beam.
Always fit Ford Original Parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other
bulbs may reduce system
performance.
Check and replace wiper blades
regularly to ensure the camera sensor
has a clear view through the
windscreen. Replacement wiper blades
must be the correct length.
E70719
Note: If you have switched autolamps on,
you can only switch the main beam on when
autolamps has switched the headlamps on.
The headlamps will come on and go off
automatically depending on the ambient
light.
Note: Keep the windscreen free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
The system will automatically switch on
main beam if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. If it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
lamps, or street lighting ahead the system
will switch off main beam before it can
distract other road users. Dipped beams
will remain on.
AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM
CONTROL
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. A manual
override may be necessary if the system
fails to switch the main beam on or off.
A camera sensor is centrally mounted
behind the windscreen of the vehicle, and
monitors conditions continuously to decide
when to switch the main beam off and on.
A manual override may be required
when approaching other road users
such as cyclists.
56
Lighting
Setting the system sensitivity
Once the system is active the main beam
will switch on if:
• It is dark enough to require the use of
main beams and
• there is no traffic or street lighting
ahead and
• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h
(25 mph).
The system has three sensitivity levels
which can be accessed via the information
display. See Information Displays (page
85).
The sensitivity determines the speed at
which the main beam will be restored after
detected traffic leaves the field of view.
The main beam will switch off if:
• The ambient light is high enough that
main beam is not required.
• An approaching vehicle's headlamps
or tail lamps are detected.
• Street lighting is detected.
• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16
mph).
• The camera sensor is too hot or
becomes blocked.
Manually overriding the system
E70725
Use the main beam lever to switch
between main beam and dipped beam.
Activating the system
Note: This is a temporary override and the
system will return to automatic operation
after a short period.
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 85). See Autolamps
(page 56).
To permanently deactivate the system use
the information display menu or turn the
lighting control switch from autolamps to
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E70719
Turn the switch to the autolamps position.
Note: The system may take a short time to
initialise after first switching the ignition on,
especially in very dark conditions. The main
beam will not automatically switch on
during this period.
E70721
WARNING
Only use the front fog lamps when
visibility is considerably restricted by
fog, snow or rain.
57
Lighting
HEADLAMP LEVELLING
REAR FOG LAMPS
Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps are
equipped with automatic headlamp
levelling.
E70720
WARNINGS
Only use the rear fog lamps when
visibility is restricted to less than 50
metres (164 feet).
A
Do not use the rear fog lamps when
it is raining or snowing and visibility
is more than 50 metres (164 feet).
B
E70722
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
- VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING/XENON
HEADLAMPS
A
Raised headlamp beams
B
Lowered headlamp beams
You can adjust the level of the headlamp
beams according to the vehicle load.
To adjust the headlamps for driving on the
left or right hand side of the road, see your
dealer.
Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions
Load
Load in luggage
compartment
Switch position
Front seats
Second row seats
1-2
-
-
0
1-2
-
-
0 (0.5 )
1-2
3
-
1 (0.5 )
58
2
2
Lighting
Load
Load in luggage
compartment
Front seats
Second row seats
1-2
3
Max
1
-
Max
1
See Vehicle identification (page 244).
2
Vehicles with active suspension.
Switch position
1
3 (0.5 )
2
1
4 (1.5 )
2
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
A
A
B
B
E72897
A
without AFS
B
with AFS
The system will not operate when the
vehicle is stationary, when you have
switched on the daytime running lamps or
when you have selected reverse gear.
The AFS adjusts the headlamp dipped
beam depending on vehicle direction and
speed. It improves visibility when you are
driving at night and helps to reduce
headlamp glare for oncoming drivers.
59
Lighting
A message will appear in the information
display if the system malfunctions. See
Information Messages (page 98). The
headlamps will move to a fixed central or
dipped position. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Cornering lamps
A
A
B
B
E72898
A
Headlamp beam
B
Cornering lamp beam
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside
of a corner when you are turning.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
E71943
For item location: See At a Glance (page
11).
60
Lighting
If you set the switch to position B, the
courtesy lamp will come on when you
unlock or open a door or the luggage
compartment lid. If you leave a door open
with the ignition switch off, the courtesy
lamp will go off automatically after some
time to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging. To switch it back on, switch
on the ignition for a short time.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
The courtesy lamp will also come on when
you switch off the ignition. It will go off
automatically after a short time or when
you start or restart the engine.
E70727
If you set the switch to position C with the
ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will
come on. It will go off automatically after
a short time to prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging. To switch it back on,
switch on the ignition for a short time.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash only three times.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Courtesy lamp
Reading lamps
A B C
E71946
A
Off
B
Door contact
If you switch off the ignition, the reading
lamps will go off automatically after some
time to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging. To switch them back on,
switch on the ignition for a short time.
C
On
LED Interior lighting
E71945
Note: Individual lamps may be switched on
independently, but not off if all lamps have
been switched on by the driver.
Note: All other lamps will be either
non-switchable or with individual reading
or dome lamp functionality only.
61
Lighting
The lamps will come on when you unlock
or open a door or the luggage
compartment lid. If you leave a door open
with the ignition switch off, all lamps will
go off automatically after some time to
prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging. To switch them back on,
switch on the ignition for a short time.
Centre mounted lamp
B
A
Side mounted lamp
A
E139420
E139419
C
B
A
Reading lamp on and off switch
B
Door function switch
C
All lamps on and off switch
D
C
A
Right-hand side reading lamp on
and off switch
B
Left-hand side reading lamp on
and off switch
C
Door function switch
D
All lamps on and off switch
If you press switch C all lamps remain off
when the door is opened. Press the switch
again to reverse.
You can control all lamps using switch D.
If you press switch B all lamps remain off
when the door is opened. Press the switch
again to reverse.
You can control all lamps using switch C.
62
Lighting
Vanity mirror lamps
A
B
E72900
E85995
A
Off
B
On
2. Remove the screws.
If you switch off the ignition, the vanity
mirror lamps will go off automatically after
a short time to prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging. To switch them back on,
switch on the ignition for a short time.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
WARNING
Have Xenon bulbs changed by a
trained technician. There is a risk of
electric shock.
1.
E88843
3. Remove the plastic screw and retainer.
Open the bonnet. See Opening and
Closing the Bonnet (page 208).
63
Lighting
Note: When fitting the headlamp, make
sure that you fully engage the headlamp in
the lower outer fixing point.
Note: When fitting the headlamp, tighten
the front screw first and then the rear screw.
5
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lights and the ignition off.
Let the bulb cool down before
removing it.
4
E85996
Have Xenon bulbs changed by a
trained technician. There is a risk of
electric shock.
4. Carefully pull the corner of the grille
and bumper towards the front of the
vehicle.
5. Carefully lift the corner of the
headlamp and push it as far as possible
towards the back of the vehicle.
CAUTIONS
Do not touch the glass of the bulb.
Only fit bulbs of the correct
specification. See Bulb
Specification Chart (page 70).
7
Note: The following instructions describe
how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacements
in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.
Headlamp
6
Note: Remove the covers to gain access to
the bulbs.
E88982
Direction indicator
6. Carefully pull the headlamp towards
the centre of the vehicle, behind the
grille and bumper, to disengage it from
the lower outer fixing point.
7. Remove the headlamp.
1.
CAUTION
When fitting the headlamp, take care
not to damage the locating points.
64
Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 63).
Lighting
3
2
2
3
E72260
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
E72259
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb
holder, turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
Cornering lamp
1.
Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 63).
Headlamp main beam
1.
Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 63).
3
2
2
E72262
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
3
E72261
Daytime running lamps
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
Note: These are not serviceable items,
please consult your dealer if they fail.
Headlamp dipped beam
1.
Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 63).
65
Lighting
3. Remove the bulb.
Approach lamp
Note: Position the mirror glass as far
inwards as possible.
E131653
Side repeater
1
E72264
1.
Insert a screwdriver into the gap
between the mirror housing and the
mirror glass and release the metal
retaining clip.
E72263
1.
3
Carefully remove the side repeater.
2
E72265
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
E72291
2. Remove the bulb holder.
66
Lighting
Front fog lamps
Rear lamps
Direction indicator
4
1
2
E86003
3
1.
Remove the trim panel.
1
E72267
Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp
bulb from the bulb holder.
Note: Do not remove the screws.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the screws.
Remove the lamp.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
E131687
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb
holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove
it.
Tail and brake lamp
Note: These are not serviceable items,
please consult your dealer if they fail.
67
Lighting
Number plate lamp
Reversing lamp and fog lamp
2
3
1
E72789
1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
E86006
1.
1
Remove the trim panel.
Interior lamps
Vehicles with LED lamps
Note: These are not serviceable items,
please consult your dealer if they fail.
E131688
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb
holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove
it.
Central high mounted brake lamp
E131655
Note: These are not serviceable items,
please consult your dealer if they fail.
68
Lighting
Reading lamps
Vehicles without interior sensors
Vehicles without interior sensors
3
3
3
2
2
E72788
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
E72796
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
Vehicles with interior sensors
Vehicles with interior sensors
3
1
2
2
2
E72787
E72786
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
and remove it.
69
Lighting
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
Luggage compartment lamp
3
E73939
3. Remove the bulb.
Vanity mirror lamp
E72784
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
E72785
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Lamp
Specification
Power (watt)
PY21W
21
Headlamp main beam
H1
55
Headlamp dipped beam
H7
55
Cornering lamp
H1
55
Side repeater
W5W
5
Approach lamp
W5W
5
H8
35
W5W
5
Front direction indicator
Front fog lamp
Side lamp
70
Lighting
Lamp
Specification
Power (watt)
PY21W
21
Rear fog lamp
H21W
21
Reversing lamp
P21W
21
Rear direction indicator
W5W
5
Interior lamp
Number plate lamp
Festoon
10
Reading lamp
BA9s
5
Vanity mirror lamp
W5W
5
Luggage compartment lamp
W6W
6
71
Windows and Mirrors
Driver’s door switches
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
Do not operate the electric windows
unless they are free from obstruction.
Note: If you operate the switches often
during a short period of time, the system
might become inoperable for a certain time
to prevent damage due to overheating.
E121510
You can operate all the windows with the
switches on the door trim panel of the
driver’s door.
Note: You can operate the windows for
several minutes after you switch off the
ignition. They will be deactivated as soon
as a door is opened.
Front and rear passengers’ door
switches
Note: If you operate both the switch on the
relevant door and the switch for that
window on the driver’s door at the same
time, the window will stop moving.
Switch on the ignition to operate the
electric windows.
Global opening and global closing
You can also operate the electric windows
with the ignition off via the global opening
and global closing function. See Global
Opening and Closing (page 40).
E70849
Note: Global opening and global closing
will open or close the windows
automatically only on vehicles equipped
with four electric windows.
Opening and closing the windows
automatically
Note: Global closing will only operate if you
have set the memory correctly for each
window.
Press or lift the switch to the second action
point and release it. Press or lift it again to
stop the windows.
Safety switch for rear windows
WARNING
On some vehicles, pressing the
switch will also lock the rear doors
from inside. See Child Safety
Locks (page 28).
Note: You can always operate the rear
windows from the driver’s door.
72
Windows and Mirrors
2. Close the window a third time to the
resistance. The anti-trap function is
disabled and you cannot close the
window automatically. The window
will override the resistance and you can
close it fully.
3. If the window does not close after the
third attempt, have it checked by a
properly trained technician.
Resetting the memory of the
electric windows
E121511
A switch in the driver’s door disables the
rear electric window switches.
WARNING
The anti-trap function is deactivated
until you have reset the memory.
The light in the switch illuminates and the
lights in the rear window switches go off
when the rear windows are disabled.
After the battery has been disconnected
from the vehicle you must reset the
memory separately for each window:
Anti-trap function
WARNING
1.
Lift the switch until the window is fully
closed. Hold the switch lifted for one
more second.
2. Release the switch and lift it again, two
or three times, for one more second.
3. Open the window and try to close it
automatically.
4. Reset and repeat procedure if the
window does not close automatically.
Careless closing of the windows can
override the protection function and
cause injuries.
The electric windows will stop
automatically while closing and reverse
some distance if there is an obstacle in the
way.
Overriding the anti-trap function
Safety mode
CAUTION
WARNING
While you close the window for the
third time, the anti-trap function is
disabled. Make sure there are no
obstacles in the way of the closing window.
The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure.
If the system detects a malfunction, it
enters a safety mode. The windows will
move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time
and then stop again. Close the windows
by pressing the switch again when the
windows stop moving. Have this checked
immediately.
To override this protection function when
there is a resistance, for example, in the
winter, proceed as follows:
1.
Close the window twice until it reaches
the resistance and let it reverse.
73
Windows and Mirrors
Mirror tilting positions
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
WARNING
Do not overestimate the distance of
the objects that you see in the
convex mirror. Objects seen in
convex mirrors will appear smaller and
further away than they actually are.
E70847
Manual folding mirrors
Push the mirror towards the door window
glass.
The electric exterior mirrors are fitted with
a heating element that will defrost or
demist the mirror glass. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 113).
Unfolding
Electric folding mirrors
Folding
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror
in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Automatic folding and unfolding
ELECTRIC EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
The mirrors will fold automatically when
you lock the vehicle with the key, the
remote control or a keyless entry system
request. The mirrors will unfold when you
unlock the vehicle with the key, the remote
control, a keyless entry system request,
the driver's interior door handle or starting
the engine.
A
Note: If the mirrors have been folded using
the manual fold button they can only be
unfolded using the manual fold button.
Manual folding and unfolding
C
The electric folding mirrors operate with
the ignition on.
B
E70846
A
Left-hand mirror
B
Off
C
Right-hand mirror
Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirror
tilting and folding) for several minutes after
you switch off the ignition. They will be
deactivated as soon as a door is opened.
74
Windows and Mirrors
When you first use this feature, the mirror
will dip to a preset position. This position
can be adjusted using the following
sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E72623
Turn the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
Select the desired exterior mirror (A or
C).
Select reverse gear, the selected
exterior mirror will adjust to a preset
position.
Adjust the mirror to the required dipped
position.
Disengage reverse gear or press and
hold the desired memory pre-set
button until a single chime sounds to
confirm. See Memory Function (page
130).
Press the button to fold or unfold the
mirrors.
The settings will be stored automatically.
If you press the switch again while the
mirrors are moving, they will stop and
reverse the direction of movement.
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
Note: When the mirrors are operated often
during a short period of time, the system
may become inoperable for a period of time
to prevent damage due to overheating.
Reverse mirror dipping
Depending on the switch position (A or C),
the relevant exterior mirror will dip
whenever you select reverse gear, giving
you a view of the kerb.
E71028
The auto-dimming mirror will adjust
automatically when hit by glaring light
from behind. It will not work when you have
selected reverse gear.
Note: You can disable this feature by
leaving the switch in position B.
The exterior mirror will return to the original
position:
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h
(6 mph).
• Approximately 10 seconds after reverse
gear has been disengaged.
• If the switch is returned to position B.
75
Windows and Mirrors
BLIND SPOT MONITOR
Blind spot information system
(BLIS)
WARNINGS
The system is not designed to
prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects. The system only provides
a warning to assist you in detecting
vehicles in the blind spot zones. The
system will not detect obstacles,
pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.
E124736
Note: Both indicators will illuminate briefly
when you switch the ignition on to confirm
that the system is operational.
Note: On vehicles with automatic
transmission, the system is active only in S,
D and N.
Do not use the system as a
replacement for using the side and
rear view mirrors, and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. The
system is not a replacement for careful
driving and is only to be used as an aid.
The system is only active when you exceed
10 km/h (6 mph). The system is
temporarily deactivated when you select
reverse gear.
System detection and alerts
The system is a convenience feature that
aids the driver in detecting vehicles that
may have entered the blind spot zone (A).
The detection area is on both sides of the
vehicle extending rearwards from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 3 metres
(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The system
will alert you if certain vehicles enter the
blind spot zone whilst driving.
The system will trigger the alert for vehicles
that enter the blind spot zone from the rear
or merge from the side. Vehicles that you
pass, or vehicles that enter the blind spot
zone from the front, will only trigger the
alert after the vehicle has remained in the
blind spot zone for a short period of time.
Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind
zone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds)
will not trigger the alert.
A
The system consists of two radar sensors
each located behind the rear wheels
hidden behind the bumpers.
CAUTIONS
Do not place items such as bumper
stickers in this area.
A
Repairs to these areas using body filler
will affect the performance of the
system.
E124788
Using the system
The system displays a yellow indicator
located in the exterior mirrors.
76
Windows and Mirrors
•
•
Cyclists and motorcyclists.
Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly
behind but very close.
Turning the system on and off
Note: The on or off position will remain until
manually changed.
You can turn the system on and off using
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 85).
E124741
When you turn the system off no further
alerts will be received. The BLIS warning
indicator will illuminate. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 81).
Detection limitations
There may be certain instances where
vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot
zones may not be detected.
Detection errors
Instances which may cause non-detection:
• Debris build up on the rear bumper
panels in the area of the sensors.
• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at high speed.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Several vehicles passing through the
blind zone following each other closely.
Note: The alert indicator in the mirror will
not illuminate.
If the system senses a fault on either
sensor, the system warning symbol will
illuminate and remain on. The information
display will confirm the fault and indicate
whether the left or right side is affected.
Blocked sensor
WARNING
Prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and issuing a
warning, the number of missed
objects will increase.
False alerts
Note: False alerts are temporary and will
self correct.
There may be certain instances when the
system will alert with no vehicle present in
the blind zone.
CAUTION
The sensors may not detect vehicles
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Circumstances where false alerts may
occur:
• Road guardrails.
• Motorway concrete walls.
• Construction areas.
• Sharp turns around a building.
• Bushes and trees.
Note: Keep the rear bumper area
surrounding the sensors free from dirt, ice
and snow.
If a sensor becomes blocked the system
performance may degrade. A blocked
sensor message may be displayed.
77
Windows and Mirrors
The system will automatically return to
normal operation once two other vehicles
have been detected on both sides.
Trailer towing false alerts
CAUTION
Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow
module not approved by us may not
correctly be detected. Switch the
system off to avoid false alerts. See
Information Displays (page 85).
If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer tow
module approved by us, the system will
detect a connected trailer and deactivate.
A confirmation message will be shown in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 98). The BLIS warning
indicator will illuminate. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 81).
78
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
A
B
C
E72984
A
Tachometer
B
Engine coolant temperature gauge
C
Fuel gauge
D
Speedometer
79
D
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
A
B
D
E
C
E130765
A
Tachometer
B
Speedometer
C
Engine coolant temperature gauge
D
Fuel gauge
E
Message centre. See Information Displays (page 85).
CAUTION
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been
resolved.
Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within
the message centre and will not be
displayed unless required. See Information
Displays (page 85).
If the indicator moves towards 120°C, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the indicator will remain in the centre
section.
80
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge
Airbag warning lamp
Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within
the message centre.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technician.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol tells you on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
Blind spot monitor indicator
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
It will illuminate when this
feature is switched off or in
E124823
conjunction with a message.
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76). See
Information Messages (page 98).
The following warning lamps and
indicators will illuminate briefly when you
switch the ignition on to confirm that the
system is operational:
• ABS
• Airbag
• Blind spot monitor
• Brake system
• Coolant temperature
• Engine
• Frost
• Ignition
• Oil pressure
• Stability control (ESP).
Brake system lamp
It illuminates when the parking
brake is engaged.
WARNING
Reduce your speed gradually and
stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Use your brakes with care.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technician
immediately.
If a warning or indicator lamp does not
illuminate when the ignition is switched
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the
system checked by properly trained
technician.
Coolant temperature warning
lamp
CAUTION
ABS warning lamp
Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being
correct. Have the system checked by
a properly trained technician immediately.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have normal braking (without ABS).
Have the system checked by a properly
trained technician as soon as possible.
81
Instrument Cluster
Frost warning lamp
If it stays on after starting or
illuminates when driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the
coolant level. See Engine Coolant Check
(page 220).
WARNING
Even if the temperature rises to
above 4ºC (39.2°F) there is no
guarantee that the road is free of
hazards caused by inclement weather.
Direction indicators
Flashes during operation. A
sudden increase in the rate of
flashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 64).
It will illuminate and glow orange
when the outside air
temperature is between 4ºC
(39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow red
when the temperature is below 0ºC
(32ºF).
Engine warning lamp
Glow plug indicator
See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 137).
If it illuminates with the engine
running, this indicates a
malfunction. If it flashes when
you are driving, reduce the speed of your
vehicle immediately. If it continues to
flash, avoid heavy acceleration or
deceleration. Have the system checked by
a properly trained technician immediately.
Headlamp indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp dipped beam or
the side and tail lamps on.
CAUTION
Ignition warning lamp
If the engine warning lamp illuminates
in conjunction with a message, have
the system checked as soon as
possible.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical equipment. Have
the system checked by a properly trained
technician immediately.
Forward alert indicator
E124824
It will illuminate when this
feature is switched off. See
Forward alert function (page
Lane departure warning indicator
172).
It will illuminate when this
feature is switched off or in
conjunction with a message. The
indicator will go out when you switch the
system back on or when you switch the
ignition off. See Lane Departure Warning
(page 177). See Information Messages
(page 98).
Front fog lamp indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
82
Instrument Cluster
Low fuel level warning lamp
Shift indicator
If it illuminates, refuel as soon as
possible.
It will illuminate to inform you
that shifting to a higher gear may
give better fuel economy and
lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminate
during periods of high acceleration, braking
or when the clutch pedal is pressed.
Main beam indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp main beam on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Stability control (ESP) warning
lamp
While driving, it flashes during
activation of the system. After
switching on the ignition, if it
does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously while driving, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technician
as soon as possible.
Message indicator
It will illuminate when a new
message is stored in the
information display. See
Information Messages (page 98).
Oil pressure warning lamp
CAUTION
If you switch ESP off, the warning lamp will
illuminate. The lamp will go out when you
switch the system back on or when you
switch the ignition off.
Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being
correct. Have the system checked by
a properly trained technician immediately.
Start-stop indicator
If it stays on after starting or
illuminates when driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
It will illuminate to inform you
when the engine shuts down or
in conjunction with a message.
See Using start-stop (page 140). See
Information Messages (page 98).
Rear fog lamp indicator
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
It will illuminate when you switch
the rear fog lamps on.
Switching the chimes on and off
You can deactivate certain chimes.
Seat belt reminder
To set which chimes should sound:
See Seat belt reminder (page
33).
83
Instrument Cluster
E70499
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Chimes and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the chime and press the OK
button to switch the chime on and off.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Press and hold the left arrow
button to return to the main menu
display.
84
Information Displays
Press the up and down arrow buttons:
GENERAL INFORMATION
•
WARNING
•
Do not operate the information
display controls when the vehicle is
moving.
to scroll through the trip computer
displays
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button:
•
Note: The information display will remain
on for several minutes after you switch off
the ignition.
•
to enter the main menu from the trip
computer displays
to enter a sub-menu.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the buttons on your
steering wheel. Corresponding information
is displayed in the information display.
Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
For detailed instructions on audio,
navigation, phone etc. refer to the
appropriate manual.
Note: The system will return to the trip
computer displays automatically if you do
not press any button for a period of time.
Controls
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting.
Hold the left arrow button pressed at any
time to return to the main menu display
(escape button).
E70499
Instrument cluster functions
Function
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Trip computer
X
X
X
Information messages
X
X
X
Clock setup
X
X
X
Display settings
-
X
X
Park heater setup
-
X
X
85
Information Displays
Function
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Navigation control
-
-
X
CD control
-
-
X
CD changer control
-
-
X
Radio control
-
-
X
Phone control
-
-
X
Auxiliary input control
-
-
X
Press the up and down arrow buttons on
the steering wheel to scroll through the trip
computer displays. See Trip Computer
(page 94).
Type 1
E80604
86
Information Displays
Menu structure
BLIS
ECO MODE
Gear Shifting
Anticipation
Speed
For more Info
Reset trip
Trip Odo
Avg Fuel
Avg Speed
All values
Information
Messages
Auto StartStop
Clock
Set Clock
24 Hour Mode
12 Hour Mode
E131626
Press the up and down arrow buttons on
the steering wheel to scroll through the trip
computer displays. See Trip Computer
(page 94).
Type 2
09:00
Average Fuel
l
6.3 100km
123456 km
234.2 km
E74426
87
Information Displays
Menu structure
ESP
BLIS
ECO MODE
Gear shifting
Anticipation
Speed
For more Info
Trip Odo
Avg fuel
Avg speed
All
Messages
Auto StartStop
Tyre Press.
Set Clock
24 Hour Mode
12 Hour Mode
Display
Configure
Reset Trip
Information
Clock
Setup
Language
Measure unit
A
B
E131627
88
Help Screen
Radio Info
Phone Info
NAV info
Always off
On guidance
Always on
English
Deutsch
Italiano
Français
Español
Türkçe
Pyccкий
Nederlands
Polski
Svenska
Português
Metric
Imperial
Information Displays
A
B
Chimes
Low Fuel
General info.
General warn.
Home light
Forw Alert
Low
Normal
High
Off
Hill Launch
Off
Auto
Manual
Tyre Pressure
Check
Low load
High load
Alarm
Full guard
Reduced
Ask on exit
Aux. Heater
Time 1
Set Time
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Time 2
Set Time
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Parkheater
E87753
Once
Active now
89
Information Displays
Type 3
CD
CD changer
Radio
Phone
E88048
Trip computer
Use the controls to scroll through the menu
displays.
Settings
Device list
The highlighted icon shows the current
menu in use.
Auxiliary input
Navigation
90
Information Displays
Menu structure
Navigation
Home
Destinat. mem.
Destinat. A-Z
Last destinat.
Cancel guidan.
Destinations
Destinations
Destinations
CD
Folder / Tracks
CD changer
CD 1
CD 2
CD 3
CD 4
CD 5
CD 6
Folder / Tracks
Folder / Tracks
Folder / Tracks
Folder / Tracks
Folder / Tracks
Folder / Tracks
Radio
Station list
FM 1 / FM
FM 2
FM 3
FM - AST
MW / AM
LW / AM-AST
Stations
Stations
Stations
Stations
Stations
Stations
Stations
Phone
Phone book
Redial
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Call status
Numbers
Trip computer
Numbers
Numbers
Distance to empty
Average fuel
Average speed
Reset selected element
Reset trip odometer
A
E131628
91
Information Displays
A
Settings
ESP
BLIS
ECOMODE
Gear shifting
Anticipation
Speed
More info
Messages
Driver alert
Auto StartStop
Tyre Pressure
Coolant temperature
Information
Set Clock
24-hour mode
12-hour mode
Driver alert
Colour themes
Display
Configure
Help Screen
NAV info
Always off
On guidance
Always on
Language
Clock
Setup
English
Deutsch
Italiano
Français
Español
Türkçe
Pyccкий
Nederlands
Polski
Svenska
Português
A
B
Measure unit
C
Metric
Imperial
E131629
92
Information Displays
C
Chimes
Low Fuel
General info.
General warn.
Home light
Forw Alert
Low
Normal
High
Off
Lane depart
Sensitivity
Normal
High
Intensity
High
Normal
Low
Auto beam
On
Sensitivity
Hill Launch
Off
Auto
Manual
Tyre Pressure
Check
Low load
High load
Alarm
Full guard
Reduced
Ask on exit
Aux Heater
E131630
93
High
Normal
Low
Information Displays
A
B
Park heater
Time 1
Set Time
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Time 2
Set Time
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Once
Active now
E88067
Auxiliary input
Average fuel consumption
TRIP COMPUTER
Indicates the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.
Odometer
Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
Average speed
Tripmeter
Indicates the average speed calculated
since the function was last reset.
Registers the mileage of individual
journeys.
Outside air temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Distance to empty
Indicates the approximate distance the
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
94
Information Displays
Type 1 and 2
Resetting the trip computer using the
main menu
To reset a particular display:
10:20
1.
2.
Average Fuel
l
6.3 100km
A
123456 km
B
234.2 km
C
3.
4.
5.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Reset Trip with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the function to be reset.
Press the right arrow button to select
the function.
Hold the OK button pressed.
To reset all three displays, select All
values and hold the OK button pressed.
E74428
Type 3
A. Trip computer
B. Odometer
C. Tripmeter
The trip computer includes the following
information displays:
Average fuel
Average speed
A
E88049
Outside air
A
Reset Trip
Trip computer
Press the OK button on the steering wheel
to cycle through the different trip computer
displays. To reset a value, press and hold
the OK button.
Dist. to empty
E74441
Resetting the trip computer using the
main menu
Press the up and down arrow buttons on
the steering wheel to scroll through the trip
computer displays.
To reset a particular display:
1.
Highlight Trip Computer with the up
and down arrow buttons and press the
right arrow button.
2. Highlight the function to be reset.
Note: The position of the trip computer
display may vary depending on the
information shown in the display.
95
Information Displays
3. Hold the OK button pressed.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press the right
arrow button.
5. To toggle the Help screen and NAV
Info on and off, highlight the desired
setting and press the OK button to
confirm the setting.
PERSONALISED SETTINGS
The following information is displayed in
the information display if you have
selected it:
Help screen, radio, navigation and
phone information
The help screen appears for a few seconds
when you switch the ignition on.
Navigation information
If the radio, navigation or telephone is
operating, information relating to this
system is displayed in the information
display.
You can also choose when the navigation
information is displayed in the information
display. Three options are available:
•
To select which information is displayed
in the information display:
•
Type 1 and 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Configure and press the right
arrow button.
To toggle the Help screen, Radio Info
and Phone Info on and off, highlight
the desired setting and press the OK
button to confirm the setting.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
•
To set when navigation information should
be displayed:
Type 1 and 2
1.
2.
3.
Type 3
1.
Always off: No navigation information
is displayed in the information display.
On guidance: The navigation
information will only appear when the
navigation system provides a guidance
instruction. This function is only
available on certain navigation
systems.
Always on: Navigation information will
always appear in the information
display when the navigation system is
operating.
4.
Highlight Settings with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
5.
96
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Configure and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Nav Info and press the right
arrow button.
Information Displays
6. Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
7. Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
Type 3
1.
Type 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Highlight Settings with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Configure and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Nav Info and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Units of measure
Note: The outside air temperature is only
displayed in degrees Celsius and cannot be
set to degrees Fahrenheit.
Language
To select metric or imperial units:
A choice of eleven languages are available:
Type 1 and 2
English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,
Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedish
and Portuguese.
1.
2.
Type 1 and 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Highlight Settings with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Language and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Language and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
3.
4.
5.
6.
97
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Measure Unit and press the
right arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
Press the left arrow button to return to
exit the menu. Hold the left arrow
button pressed to return to the trip
computer display.
Information Displays
Message symbols
Type 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Highlight Settings with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Display and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Measure Unit and press the
right arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
See Owner’s handbook.
Have the system checked at the
next service.
Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
Viewing current messages
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Type 1 and 2
1.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Information with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
3. Highlight Messages and press the right
arrow button.
4. Use the up and down buttons to view
the current messages.
E70499
Type 3
Press OK to acknowledge and remove
some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
1.
2.
With instrument cluster type 3, certain
messages need to be confirmed before
you can access the menus.
3.
Message indicator
4.
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages. It will be red or amber
depending on the severity of the message
and will remain on until the cause of the
message has been rectified.
5.
98
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Settings with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Information with the up and
down arrow buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight Messages and press the right
arrow button.
Use the up and down buttons to view
the current messages.
Information Displays
Active suspension
Message
Indicator
Action
IVDC malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician.
IVDC comfort
-
See Active suspension (page 159).
IVDC normal
-
See Active suspension (page 159).
IVDC sport
-
See Active suspension (page 159).
Message
Indicator
Action
Airbag malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Airbag
Alarm
Message
Indicator
Action
Alarm triggered
amber
See Alarm (page 46).
Alarm system
service reqd.
-
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician.
Automatic main beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert
Message
Indicator
Action
Driver fatigue
Rest now
red
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Front camera
Clean screen
amber
The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.
Clean the windscreen.
Front camera
malfunction
amber
The front camera sensor has malfunctioned.
Have this checked as soon as possible.
99
Information Displays
Message
Indicator
Action
Front camera
not available
amber
The affected systems are temporarily unavailable, and should resume after a few minutes.
Driver fatigue
Rest suggested
amber
Take a rest break soon.
Lane departure
warn. malfunct.
amber
The system has malfunctioned. Have this
checked as soon as possible.
Battery and charging system
Message
Overvoltage: Stop
safely!
Low battery
Indicator
Action
red
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch off the ignition. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technician as soon
as possible.
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Message
Indicator
Action
BLIS sensor
blocked
amber
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).
BLIS right sensor
malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
BLIS left sensor
malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
BLIS malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
BLIS inactive Trailer
attach'd
amber
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).
Blind spot monitor
100
Information Displays
Child power lock
Message
Child lock malfunction
Indicator
amber
Action
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Climate control
Message
Indicator
Action
Aux. Heater on
amber
See Auxiliary Heater (page 114).
Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Message
Indicator
Action
ACC malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Clean radar sensor
amber
See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 167).
Forward Alert
malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Cruise control
active
-
See Cruise Control (page 165).
Cruise control
standby
-
See Cruise Control (page 165).
ACC unavailable
-
See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 167).
Message
Indicator
Action
Driver door open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close.
Driver side rear door
open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close.
Passenger door
open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close.
Doors open
101
Information Displays
Message
Indicator
Action
Passenger side rear
door open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close.
Luggage comp.
open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close.
Bonnet open
red
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and close. See Opening and
Closing the Bonnet (page 208).
Message
Indicator
Action
Immobiliser active
amber
See Engine immobiliser (page 45).
Message
Indicator
Action
Hill Launch not
available
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician.
Please use park
brake !
amber
See Hill Start Assist (page 156).
Hill Launch Assist
active
-
See Hill Start Assist (page 156).
Hill Launch Assist
off
-
See Hill Start Assist (page 156).
Message
Indicator
Action
Steering malfunction
red
Have this checked as soon as possible.
Engine immobiliser
Hill start assist
Keyless system
Key not detected
amber
See Keyless Entry (page 41).
Car operative Press
STOP
amber
The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.
See Keyless Starting (page 133).
102
Information Displays
Message
Indicator
Action
Key outside car
amber
See Keyless Entry (page 41).
Key battery low
amber
See Changing the remote control battery
(page 35).
Steering locked Retry
-
See Steering Wheel Lock (page 135).
Message
Indicator
Action
Front lights
malfunction
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Low beam: Bulb
fault
-
One or both of the headlamp dipped beam bulbs
have blown. Check the headlamp dipped beam
bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64).
Rear fog light: Bulb
fault
-
One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs have
blown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See
Changing a Bulb (page 64).
Stop lamps: Bulb
fault
-
One or both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown.
Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing a
Bulb (page 64).
Trailer stopl.: Bulb
fault
-
One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on your
trailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs
on your trailer.
Trailer turnl.: Bulb
fault
-
One or both of the direction indicator bulbs on
your trailer have blown. Check the direction
indicator bulbs on your trailer.
Lighting
103
Information Displays
Maintenance
Message
Indicator
Action
Engine malfunction
red
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Check engine oil
level
amber
See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
Water detected in
fuel
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Low washer fluid
level
-
See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
Service oil
-
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician.
Message
Indicator
Action
Crash mode
-
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Message
Indicator
Action
Park brake applied
red
See Parking Brake (page 154).
Park brake applied
amber
See Parking Brake (page 154).
Occupant protection
Parking brake
Power steering
Message
Indicator
Action
Power steering
malfunction
amber
Full steering will be maintained but you will need
to exert greater force on the steering wheel. Have
the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
104
Information Displays
Stability control (ESP)
Message
Indicator
Action
ESP malfunction
-
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
ESP off
-
See Using Stability Control (page 155).
Start-stop
Message
Message
indicator
Action
Auto StartStop Switch
ign off
red
Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicle
if the system has shut down the engine. See Using
start-stop (page 140).
Auto StartStop Press
clutch
-
The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch
pedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 140).
Auto StartStop Select
neutral
-
Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.
See Using start-stop (page 140).
StartStop: Man. start
required
-
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is
required.
Transmission
Message
Indicator
Action
Transmission
malfunction
red
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician immediately.
Transmission overtemperatur
amber
Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
105
Information Displays
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Message
Indicator
Action
Check ..... tyre!
red
The tyre indicated has continued to deflate.
Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommended
pressure. See Technical Specifications (page
240).
Check tyre pressures
red
One or more of the tyres are significantly underinflated. This message may be displayed after a
new sensor has been installed. Check the tyres
and inflate them to the recommended pressure.
See Technical Specifications (page 240).
Check ..... tyre
amber
The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated.
Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommended
pressure. See Technical Specifications (page
240).
Tyre monitor
malfunction
amber
You have installed a temporary spare wheel.
Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with a
sensor as soon as possible. When a malfunction
occurs, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tyre pressure.
Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, an
unapproved accessory is interfering with the
system or a general malfunction has been
detected. Have the system checked by a properly
trained technician as soon as possible. When a
malfunction occurs, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tyre pressure.
Inflate tyres for high
speed
amber
The tyre pressures are not suitable for driving at
160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to the
recommended pressure. See Technical
Specifications (page 240). This message will be
displayed for only a few seconds with a low tyre
pressure warning.
Tyre sensors not
detected
-
You have installed wheels and tyres that do not
have sensors. The tyre pressures will not be
monitored.
All sensors have malfunctioned or an unapproved
accessory is interfering with the system. Have the
system checked by a properly trained technician
as soon as possible.
106
Information Displays
Voice control
Message
Indicator
Action
Voice control
Please speak
-
See Voice control (page 279).
Voice control Not
recognised
-
See Voice control (page 279).
Voice control Not
allowed
-
See Voice control (page 279).
107
Climate Control
Warming the interior
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Direct the air towards your feet. In cold or
humid weather conditions, direct some of
the air towards the windscreen and the
door windows.
Outside air
Keep the air intakes forward of the
windscreen free from obstruction (snow,
leaves etc.) to allow the climate control
system to function effectively.
Cooling the interior
Direct the air towards your face.
Recirculated air
AIR VENTS
CAUTION
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to mist up. If the
windows mist up, follow the settings
for defrosting and demisting the
windscreen.
Front air vents
The air currently in the passenger
compartment will be recirculated. Outside
air will not enter the vehicle.
Heating
E71942
Heating performance depends on the
temperature of the engine coolant.
Rear air vents
Air conditioning
B
A
Note: The air conditioning operates only
when the temperature is above 4°C (39°F).
Note: If you use the air conditioning, the
fuel consumption of your vehicle will be
higher.
Air is directed through the evaporator
where it is cooled. Humidity is extracted
from the air to help keep the windows free
of mist. The resulting condensation is
directed to the outside of the vehicle and
it is therefore normal if you see a small
pool of water under your vehicle.
E89129
General information on controlling
the interior climate
Fully close all the windows.
108
A
Open
B
Close
Climate Control
Blower
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution control
A
F
B
E
C
A
E75470
A
D
E71379
Off
A
Windscreen
Note: If you switch the blower off, the
windscreen may mist up.
Recirculated air
B
Footwell and windscreen
C
Footwell
D
Face level and footwell
E
Face level
F
Face level and windscreen
E73059
Press the button to toggle between outside
air and recirculated air.
You can set the air distribution control to
any position between the symbols.
Heating the interior quickly
E71377
109
Climate Control
Ventilation
Cooling the interior quickly
E71381
E71378
Defrosting and demisting the
windscreen
Set the air distribution control, blower and
air vents to suit your requirements.
Note: Turn the air conditioning on to assist
windscreen and side window demisting.
Air conditioning
Note: Turn the heater control to maximum
heat to assist windscreen and side window
defrosting.
Switching the air conditioning on and
off
If you turn the blower off, the air
conditioning will turn off. When you turn
the blower on again, the air conditioning
will come on automatically.
E71382
Cooling with outside air
Make sure that the blower and A/C is on.
The indicator in the switch will illuminate
during defrosting and demisting.
If you move the air distribution control to
a position other than A, the A/C will
remain on.
You can switch the air conditioning and
recirculated air on and off while the air
distribution control is set to position A.
If necessary, switch the heated windows
on. See Heated Windows and Mirrors
(page 113).
E71380
110
Climate Control
Reducing interior air humidity
E71383
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E91390
The system controls the temperature,
amount and distribution of the air flow
automatically and adjusts them according
to the driving and weather conditions.
Pressing the AUTO button once switches
on the auto mode.
Note: Avoid adjusting the settings when
the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.
The automatic climate control adjusts to
the current circumstances automatically.
For the system to function properly, the side
and centre vents should be fully open.
The system in your vehicle is dual-zone
automatic climate control. When the
system is in mono mode, all the
temperature zones are linked to the driver's
zone. When you switch mono mode off,
the dual-zone system allows you to set
different temperatures for the driver's and
front passenger's side.
Note: The sunload sensor is located on top
of the instrument panel. Do not cover the
sensor with any objects.
Note: At low outside temperatures, when
the system is in auto mode, the air stream
will be directed to the windscreen and the
side windows as long as the engine is cold.
Note: For information on the automatic
climate control, on vehicles fitted with a
combined Navigation and automatic
climate control system, see separate
handbook.
111
Climate Control
Setting the temperature
Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO,
both sides will be set to HI or LO.
To switch mono mode back on
To switch mono mode back on,
press the MONO button.
MONO reappears in the display
and the passenger’s side temperature will
be adjusted to the driver’s side
temperature.
E70306
E91391
You can set the temperature between
15.5ºC (60°F) and 29.5ºC (85°F) in steps
of 0.5ºC (1°F). In position LO, 15ºC (59°F),
the system will switch to permanent
cooling. In position HI, 30°C (86°F), the
system will switch to permanent heating.
Blower
Use the buttons to adjust the
blower speed.
Note: If either position LO or HI is selected,
the system will not regulate a stable
temperature.
The blower setting is indicated in the
display.
Mono mode
To return to auto mode, press the AUTO
button.
In mono mode, the temperature settings
for both the driver’s and passenger’s side
are linked. If you adjust the temperature
using the rotary control on the driver’s side,
the settings will be adjusted to the same
setting on the passenger’s side. In mono
mode, MONO appears in the display.
Air distribution
To adjust air distribution, press the desired
button. Any combination of settings can
be selected simultaneously.
To switch mono mode off
Select a temperature for the passenger’s
side with the rotary control on the
passenger’s side. Mono mode will switch
off and MONO disappears from the
display. The temperature for the driver’s
side will remain unchanged. You can now
adjust the driver and passenger side
temperatures independently of each
another. The temperature settings for each
side are shown in the display. You can set
a temperature difference of up to 4ºC
(8°F).
A
B
C
E70308
A
Footwell
B
Face level
C
Windscreen
When you select windscreen defrosting
and demisting, A, B and C switch off
automatically and the air conditioning
switches on. Outside air will flow into the
vehicle. You cannot select recirculated air.
Note: If you set a temperature difference
of greater than 4ºC (8°F), the temperature
on the other side will be adjusted so that
the difference remains 4ºC (8°F).
112
Climate Control
Windscreen defrosting and
demisting
Switching off the automatic
climate control
Press the windscreen defrosting
and demisting button. Outside
air will flow into the vehicle. Air
conditioning is automatically selected. As
long as the air distribution is set to this
position, you cannot select recirculated air.
Press the OFF button.
E91392
E91394
When switched off, the heating, ventilation
and air conditioning system is switched off
and recirculated air is selected.
The blower speed and the temperature
control operate automatically and cannot
be adjusted manually. The blower is set to
high speed and the temperature to HI.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
When you select windscreen defrosting
and demisting, the heated screens switch
on automatically and switch off after a
short time.
Heated windows
To return to auto mode, press the AUTO
button.
Note: The heated windows operate only
when the engine is running.
Switching the air conditioning on
and off
Heated windscreen
Use the heated windows to defrost or
demist the windscreen or rear window.
Press the A/C button to switch
the air conditioning on and off.
A/C OFF appears in the display
when the air conditioning is switched off.
E72506
E91393
Heated rear window
A/C ON appears in the display when the
air conditioning is switched on.
E72507
Recirculated air
Heated exterior mirrors
Press the recirculated air button
to toggle between outside air
and recirculated air.
Electric exterior mirrors are fitted with a
heating element that will defrost or demist
the mirror glass. They will switch on
automatically when you switch the heated
rear window on.
Note: When the system is in auto mode and
the interior and exterior temperatures are
quite hot, the system selects recirculated
air automatically to maximise cooling of the
interior. Once the selected temperature is
reached, the system will reselect outside air
automatically.
113
Climate Control
•
AUXILIARY HEATER
Parking heater
WARNING
Once the parking heater has performed
one heating cycle, the next
programmed heating cycle will only be
carried out if you have started the
vehicle’s engine in between.
After a heating cycle, drive the vehicle
for at least the period of the heating
cycle.
The parking heater must not be
operated at filling stations, near
sources of combustible vapours or
dust or in enclosed spaces.
•
The parking heater operates independently
of the vehicle heater by heating the
engine’s coolant circuit. It is fed from the
vehicle fuel tank. You can also use it while
the vehicle is in motion to help the vehicle
heater warm up the interior more quickly.
Note: The programmed time is the time at
which you wish the vehicle to be warm and
ready to drive, not the time at which the
heater switches on.
Programming the parking heater
Note: You must programme the times at
least 70 minutes in advance of the time you
wish to set.
Used properly, the parking heater provides
the following benefits:
•
•
•
Note: You must set the time and date
correctly. See Clock (page 127).
It preheats the interior of the vehicle.
It keeps the windows clear of ice in the
event of frost and prevents
condensation.
It avoids cold starts and allows the
engine to reach operating temperature
sooner.
To programme the heating times:
Note: The parking heater will only operate
if there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6 gallons) of
fuel in the fuel tank and the ambient
temperature is below 15°C (59°F). The
heater will not operate if the battery is low.
Note: The heating depends on the outside
air temperature.
E70499
1.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
3. Highlight Park Heater and press the
right arrow button.
Note: When the parking heater is activated,
exhaust fumes may come from under the
sides of the vehicle. This is normal.
Note: On vehicles with a manual heating,
ventilation and air conditioning system, the
heating of the vehicle interior is dependent
on the temperature, air distribution and
blower control settings.
To prevent the battery from discharging:
114
Climate Control
1.
Park Heater
2.
Program 1
3.
Program 2
One-Time
Active now
4.
5.
E74467
•
•
•
The functions Program 1 and
Program 2 allow you to programme
up to two heating cycles for each day
of the week. These times will remain
stored and the heater will warm up the
vehicle at these times on these days
every week.
The function One-Time allows you to
programme one heating cycle for one
specific day.
The function Active now
automatically switches on the heater.
6.
7.
Highlight Program 1 and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the day on which the heater
should warm up the vehicle.
Press the OK button to confirm the
selection. A cross appears in the box
next to the day to show that this day is
selected.
Continue in the same way to select all
the days on which the heater should
warm up the vehicle.
To set the time at which the vehicle
should be warmed up, highlight the
time at the top of the display and press
the right arrow button.
Press the OK button and the hours
flash. Use the up and down arrow
buttons to adjust the individual settings
and the left and right arrow buttons to
move to the next or previous setting.
When you have finished, press the OK
button again to confirm the selection.
Parkheater
Program 1
Programming the functions Program 1
and Program 2
Time 1
07:55
01:12:2006
[07:55]
OK = change
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
E74469
You can use the function Program 2 to set
a second cycle, for example different times
on different days or twice on the same day.
The programming procedure is the same
as for the function Program 1.
E74468
115
Climate Control
Programming the function One-Time
Starting
1.
Hold the transmitter with the antenna
upwards and press the ON button for at
least two seconds. The LED on the
transmitter lights up green to confirm the
signal has been received.
Highlight One-Time and press the right
arrow button.
2. Press the OK button and the hours
flash. Use the up and down arrow
buttons to adjust the individual settings
and the left and right arrow buttons to
move to the next or previous setting.
3. When you have finished, press the OK
button again to confirm the selection.
Switching off
Hold the transmitter with the antenna
upwards and press the OFF button for at
least two seconds. The LED on the
transmitter lights up red to confirm the
signal has been received.
Active now
Highlight Active now and press the OK
button. A cross appears in the box next to
the function to show that the heater is
activated.
Remote start in combination with
direct start or timer
To deactivate the heater, highlight Active
now and press the OK button again.
Remote starting
The parking heater may be started and
switched off from a distance of up to 500
metres (1640 feet) using the supplied
remote control transmitter. This range will
vary depending upon local conditions and
terrain, as well as battery condition. The
remote control transmitter will indicate
whether or not the signal has been
received. The parking heater will operate
for a maximum of 30 minutes.
E114360
Remote start is integrated with normal
heater control. Parking heaters started with
direct start or timer functions can be
switched off with the remote control
transmitter and vice versa.
Note: The heater will operate, depending
on the ambient temperature, for between
10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cool
down after the heating period has elapsed,
therefore a remote start more than 30
minutes before driving is not recommended.
Feedback during starting and
switching off
Note: The remote control may not always
receive confirmation of a successful remote
command at extended operating ranges.
The LED on the transmitter illuminates red
for about two seconds. This indicates the
signal has been received by the vehicle and
the heater has switched off.
The LED on the transmitter illuminates
green for about two seconds. This
indicates the signal has been received by
the vehicle and the heater has started.
116
Climate Control
The LED on the transmitter flashes green
or red for about two seconds. This
indicates the signal was not transmitted
correctly. Repeat the transmission.
3. Install a new battery (3.3V type
CR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.
4. Re-assemble the remote control.
The LED on the transmitter illuminates
orange for about two seconds before
showing green or red. This indicates the
transmitter batteries are weak and should
be changed.
Programming the transmitter
Further transmitters may be used with the
remote system, please consult your dealer.
Up to a maximum of 3 separate remote
controls may be added. When adding extra
transmitters these must be programmed
separately.
The LED on the transmitter flashes orange
for about 5 seconds. This indicates that
the signal was not transmitted. The
transmitter batteries are discharged and
should be changed as soon as possible.
Note: The heater must be switched off
during programming.
Note: The programming procedure may be
repeated as often as is required. The oldest
programmed transmitter will be deleted
each time.
Changing the remote control
battery
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority regarding
recycling.
1.
2.
1
3.
4.
2
5.
E114361
1.
Install the battery in the new
transmitter.
Turn off the power to the receiver by
removing fuse F32 from the engine
compartment fuse box. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 196).
Wait for at least 5 seconds.
Reconnect power to the receiver by
replacing the fuse, and press the OFF
button on the new transmitter within
5 seconds until the LED light turns off.
The new transmitter is now
programmed.
Fuel operated heater (depending
on country)
Insert a screwdriver or other suitable
tool into the slot on the back of the
remote control, and unscrew the
compartment cover.
WARNING
The fuel operated heater must not
be operated at filling stations, near
sources of combustible vapours or
dust or in enclosed spaces.
CAUTION
Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
2. Carefully prise out the battery.
117
Climate Control
Diesel auxiliary heater (depending
on country)
The fuel operated heater aids in warming
the engine and the vehicle interior on
vehicles with a diesel engine. It is switched
on or off automatically depending on the
outside air temperature and the coolant
temperature, unless you have deactivated
it. When the fuel operated heater is
operating, Aux. Heater on is displayed in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 85).
The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electrical
heater) aids in warming the vehicle interior
on vehicles with a diesel engine. It is
switched on or off automatically
depending on the outside air temperature,
the coolant temperature and the alternator
load.
To deactivate the fuel operated heater:
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
WARNING
Before operating the electric sunroof
you should verify it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children
and/or pets are not in the proximity of the
sunroof opening. Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury. It is the
primary responsibility of the supervising
adults to never leave a child unattended
in a vehicle and to never leave the keys in
an unattended vehicle.
E70499
1.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down
arrow buttons and press the right arrow
button.
3. Highlight Aux. Heater and press the
OK button to toggle the heater on and
off. A cross appears in the box when
the heater is activated.
4. Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
Note: When the switches are operated
often during a short period of time, the
system might become inoperable for a
certain time to prevent damage due to
overheating.
Note: The electric sunroof can also be
operated with the ignition off via the global
opening and global closing function. See
Global Opening and Closing (page 40).
There are two ways of opening the sunroof
– the rear of the sunroof lifts open or the
sunroof opens from the front, sliding back
under the roof. The sunroof opens and
closes whilst the switch is pressed.
Switch on the ignition to operate the
electric sunroof.
The power sunroof is operated by a switch
located between the sun visors.
118
Climate Control
Opening and closing the sunroof
To open or close the sunroof automatically
press either side of the switch to the
second action point and release it
completely. Press again to stop.
When the closed position is reached, the
sunroof stops automatically.
Sunroof anti-trap protection
WARNINGS
The anti-trap function is deactivated
until the memory has been reset.
Careless closing of the window can
cause injuries.
Careless closing of the electric
sunroof can override the anti-trap
protection and cause injuries.
E72188
Tilting the sunroof
The sunroof will stop automatically while
closing and reverse some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
To override anti-trap protection when there
is a resistance, e. g. in the winter, proceed
as follows:
WARNING
While the sunroof is being closed for
the third time, the anti-trap function
is disabled. Make sure there are no
obstacles in the way of the closing sunroof.
Close the sunroof a third time to the
resistance. The anti-trap function is
disabled and the sunroof cannot be closed
automatically. The sunroof will override
the resistance and can then be closed fully.
E72189
Opening and closing the sunroof
automatically
Note: When opening automatically, the
sunroof will stop about 8 cm from the fully
opened position. This position reduces the
buffeting noise which is sometimes heard
when the sunroof is fully open. The sunroof
will only stop automatically in this position
when the sunroof is opened automatically.
If the sunroof does not close after the third
attempt, have it checked by an expert.
119
Climate Control
Sunroof safety mode
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure. Make sure that
there are no obstacles in the way of
the closing sunroof.
If the system detects a malfunction, it
enters a safety mode. The sunroof will
move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time
and then stop again. Close the sunroof by
pressing the button again when the
sunroof stops moving. When the rear of
the sunroof is lifted, lift the rear all the way
and then close the sunroof. Have the
system checked by an expert immediately.
Sunroof relearning
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure. Make sure that
there are no obstacles in the way of
the closing sunroof.
In case the sunroof no longer closes
properly, follow this relearning procedure:
•
•
•
Tilt the rear of the sunroof as far as
possible. Release the button.
Press and hold the same button again
for 30 seconds until you see the
sunroof move.
Release the button and immediately
press and hold it again. The sunroof
will close, open fully and then close
again. Do not release the button before
the sunroof has reached the closed
position for the second time.
If the button is not pressed continuously,
the relearning function will be interrupted.
Start the procedure once more from the
beginning.
120
Seats
•
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
•
bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
position the shoulder strap of the seat
belt over the centre of your shoulder
and position the lap strap tightly across
your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
MANUAL SEATS
Moving the seats backwards and
forwards
E68595
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the seats when the
vehicle is moving.
Only when you use the seat belt
properly, can it hold you in a position
that allows the airbag to achieve its
optimum effect.
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seat belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a collision. We recommend that you:
•
•
•
•
•
sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forwards as possible,
remaining comfortable.
keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 250
millimetres (10 inches) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
E70728
WARNING
Rock the seat backwards and
forwards after releasing the lever to
make sure that it is fully engaged in
its catch.
121
Seats
Adjusting the lumbar support
Adjusting the angle of the
seatback
E70729
E70731
Adjusting the height of the driver’s
seat
POWER SEATS
2-way electric seat
1
1
2
E70730
2
E70733
122
Seats
8-way electric seat
2
2
1
3
1
4
3
4
8
5
7
6
5
8
7
E70734
123
6
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the head restraint
WARNINGS
When folding the seatbacks down,
take care not to get your fingers
caught between the seatback and
seat frame.
WARNINGS
Raise the rear head restraint when
the rear seat is occupied by a
passenger.
Make sure that the seats and the
seatbacks are secure and fully
engaged in their catches.
When using a forward facing child
restraint on a rear seat, always
remove the head restraint from that
seat.
Folding the seatbacks down
CAUTION
Lower the head restraints.
1
1
2
E71879
Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forwards as possible, remaining
comfortable.
E86611
1.
Press the unlock buttons down and
hold them there.
2. Push the seatback forwards.
Removing the head restraint
Creating a level load floor
Press the locking buttons and remove the
head restraint.
WARNING
Make sure the red indicator is not
showing when you engage the seat
in the catches.
124
Seats
CAUTION
Lower the head restraints.
2
2
1
3
E70601
E86612
1.
Insert your fingers between the seat
cushion and seatback and fold the seat
cushion forwards.
2. Press the unlock buttons down and
hold them there.
3. Push the seatback forwards.
Folding the seatbacks up
WARNING
E71224
When folding the seatbacks up,
make sure that the belts are visible
to an occupant and not caught
behind the seat.
Note: The number of illuminated lights
beside the button indicates the selected
step.
Note: The heater setting is indicated in red.
HEATED SEATS
Note: When no light is illuminated, the
heating is switched off.
Note: Operating this function with the
engine off will drain the battery.
Note: Only the front seat settings are stored
when you switch off the ignition.
Raising and Lowering the
Temperature
Press and hold the relevant button or press
it repeatedly to select the desired
temperature.
125
Seats
Note: When the seat is being ventilated,
the heater may switch on automatically.
This is to prevent the flow of air becoming
uncomfortably cool.
VENTILATED SEATS
Note: Operating this function with the
engine off will drain the battery.
Note: The air in the vehicle interior is used
to ventilate the seats. The cooling effect
therefore depends on the temperature of
the vehicle interior. Switch on the air
conditioning if necessary and set the air
distribution to footwell. See Climate
Control (page 108).
Raising and Lowering the
Temperature
Press and hold the relevant button or press
it repeatedly to select the desired
temperature.
E70601
E70602
Note: The number of illuminated lights
beside the button indicates the selected
step.
Note: The ventilation setting is indicated in
blue.
Note: When no light is illuminated, the
ventilation is switched off.
Note: The settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
126
Convenience features
SUN SHADES
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks
(A).
Side windows
A
A
E70723
CLOCK
Note: Some navigation systems will
automatically set the date and time on the
clock using GPS signals.
E74809
Rear window
A
Note: See General Information (page 85).
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
E86514
5.
From the main menu, select the clock
function.
Select the option required.
Press OK.
Using the right, left, up and down arrow
buttons, select and change the value.
Press OK.
CIGAR LIGHTER
CAUTIONS
If you use the socket when the engine
is not running, the battery may
discharge.
Do not hold the cigar lighter element
pressed in.
127
Convenience features
Rear ashtray
Note: Switch the ignition on to use the cigar
lighter. You can also use it for up to 30
minutes after you have switched the ignition
off.
Note: You can use the socket to power 12
volt appliances that have a maximum
current rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford
accessory connectors or connectors
specified for use with SAE standard sockets.
E73705
To remove the ashtray, open it, press it
down against the spring and remove it.
E72972
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
Press the element in to use the cigar
lighter. It will pop out automatically.
WARNING
If used when the engine is not
running, the battery may discharge.
ASHTRAY
Front ashtray
Note: You can use them with the ignition
switched off.
Note: You can use them to power 12 volt
appliances that have a maximum current
rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford
accessory connectors or connectors
specified for use with SAE standard sockets.
E72974
To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.
E78056
Locations:
• Centre console.
• Luggage compartment.
128
Convenience features
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Do not place hot drinks in the cup
holders when the vehicle is moving.
GLOVE BOX
Cooled glove box
Note: You can cool the glove box using air
from the air conditioning system.
E73704
E70885
E72905
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING
Do not drive with any storage
compartment lid open. Make sure
that you secure the lid before setting
off.
CAUTION
Do not keep heat-sensitive items and
liquids in any storage compartment.
129
E72905
Convenience features
MAP POCKETS
A
B
E86768
A
Seat adjustment controls See
Power Seats (page 122).
B
Memory pre-set buttons
E74686
Up to four different driver's seat and
exterior mirror positions can be stored in
the memory. Your preferred setting for the
reverse mirror dipping feature can also be
stored. See Electric exterior mirrors
(page 74).
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Setting a memory pre-set
Passive setting
The vehicle stores the seating and mirror
positions for up to four remote controls or
passive keys. Next time the vehicle is
unlocked, the position of the seat and
mirrors will adjust to the last used position.
The memory store function cannot
be used when the vehicle is moving.
Each time you turn the ignition off, the
current seat and mirror settings are stored
on the remote control or passive key used.
Active setting
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to
the desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button B until a single chime sounds
to confirm.
130
Convenience features
Recalling a stored seat position
5. Operate the same seat adjustment
control in the opposite direction for at
least 3 seconds. Keep it held until the
seat stops at the mechanical end of its
travel and a click is heard.
Note: To stop seat movement during a
recall, press any driver seat adjustment
control, any of the memory buttons or any
mirror control switch. Seat movement will
also stop if you move the vehicle.
GLASSES HOLDER
Passive recall
Note: If more than one passive key is in
range, the memory function will move to the
settings of the first key stored.
When you unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or pull the driver door
handle with a passive key in range, the seat
and mirrors will move to the position stored
on that remote control or passive key.
Active recall
E131605
Press the pre-set button associated with
the desired driving position. The seat and
mirrors will move to the position stored on
that pre-set.
CD CHANGER
Resetting the memory
This is located in the luggage
compartment.
If any seat position travel is interrupted
(e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss of
power supply), you will need to reset the
memory.
AUXILIARY INPUT SOCKET
You can find the socket in the glove box or
the centre console. See Auxiliary input
(AUX IN) socket (page 270).
Note: Make sure all electrical accessories
are switched off.
1. Turn the ignition to position II.
2. Operate the seat adjustment control
to move the seat in the required
direction until it stops. See Power
Seats (page 122). A click will be heard.
3. Release the seat adjustment control
and immediately press and hold the
switch in the same direction for at least
3 seconds. Keep it held until the seat
stops at the mechanical end of its
travel and a click is heard.
4. Release the seat adjustment control.
USB PORT
You can find the socket in the glove box or
the centre console. See Connectivity
(page 297).
131
Convenience features
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
When using the floor mats, always
make sure the floor mat is properly
secured using the appropriate fixings
and positioned so that it does not interfere
with the operation of the pedals.
132
Starting and Stopping the Engine
II The ignition is switched on. All electrical
circuits are operational. Warning lamps
and indicators illuminate. This is the key
position when driving. You must also select
it when being towed.
GENERAL INFORMATION
General points on starting
If the battery has been disconnected the
vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approx. 8 kilometres (5
miles) after reconnecting the battery.
III The starter motor is activated. Release
the key as soon as the engine starts.
This is because the engine management
system must realign itself with the engine.
Any unusual driving characteristics during
this period may be disregarded.
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNINGS
The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal
objects or electronic devices such as
mobile phones.
Starting the engine by towing or
pushing
WARNING
Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before
attempting to move your vehicle.
See Steering Wheel Lock (page 135).
To prevent damage you must not
push or tow start your vehicle. Use
booster cables and a booster battery.
See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page
227).
Note: The ignition may automatically
switch off after a period of time if your
vehicle has been left unattended with the
ignition on. This is to prevent the vehicle
battery from discharging.
IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside the vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start the engine.
Never return the key to position 0 or
I when the vehicle is in motion.
Note: To start your engine you must also
fully depress the brake or clutch pedal,
depending on the transmission fitted.
E72128
E85766
0 The ignition is off.
Ignition on
I The ignition and all main electrical circuits
are disabled.
Press the button once. All electrical circuits
are operational, warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long to avoid discharging
the battery.
133
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting with manual transmission
Type 1
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during
engine start will stop the engine cranking
and return to ignition on.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Briefly press the button.
3. If the engine does not start, fully
depress the brake and clutch pedals.
Starting with automatic
transmission
Note: Releasing the brake pedal during
engine start will stop the engine cranking
and return to ignition on.
E87382
1.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Briefly press the button.
1.
Hold the key next to the steering
column shroud exactly as shown.
2. With the key in this position you can
use the button to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Starting a diesel engine
Type 2
Note: Engine cranking may not commence
until the engine glow plug cycle has been
completed. This may take several seconds
in extremely cold conditions.
Note: Continue to press the clutch or brake
pedal until engine cranking begins.
Failure to start
The passive starting system will not
function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The passive key battery is flat.
If you are unable to start your vehicle carry
out the following procedure.
E87381
1.
134
Carefully prise out the cover.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the engine when the
vehicle is moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not be locked, but higher
effort will be required. When the ignition is
switched off some electrical circuits,
warning lamps and indicators may also be
OFF.
Press and hold the button for two seconds,
or press three times within three seconds.
E85767
2. Insert the key into the key holder.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
WARNING
Always check that the steering is
unlocked before attempting to move
your vehicle.
E85766
3. With the key in this position you can
press the button to switch the ignition
on and start your vehicle.
Vehicles without keyless starting
Stopping the engine with the
vehicle stationary
To activate the steering wheel lock;
1.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Turn the steering wheel.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits,
warning lamps and indicators will be
switched off.
Vehicles with keyless starting
Manual transmission
Note: The steering wheel lock will not
activate when the ignition is on or the
vehicle is moving.
Briefly press the button.
Automatic transmission
Your vehicle has an electronically
controlled steering wheel lock. This
operates automatically.
1.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Briefly press the button.
The steering wheel lock will activate after
a short period of time once you have
parked your vehicle and the passive key is
outside of the vehicle.
135
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Deactivating the steering wheel lock
All vehicles
Switch the ignition on, or:
If the engine does not start, wait for a short
period and try again.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
• Press the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the
flooded engine procedure.
Vehicles with manual transmission
• Press the clutch pedal.
If you have difficulty starting the engine
when the temperature is below -25°C
(-13°F), press the accelerator pedal to the
mid-way point of its travel and try again.
STARTING A PETROL ENGINE
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time, for example 10
seconds. The number of start attempts is
limited to approximately six. If you exceed
this limit, the system will not allow you to
try again until a period of time has elapsed,
for example 30 minutes. A message will be
shown in the display. See Information
Messages (page 98).
Flooded engine
Vehicles with manual transmission
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
Cold or hot engine
1.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during
engine start may stop the engine cranking
and return to ignition on.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
All vehicles
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the engine does not start, repeat the cold
or hot engine procedure.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Engine idle speed after starting
Note: Releasing the brake pedal during
engine start may stop the engine cranking
and return to ignition on.
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting will vary
depending on the engine temperature.
1.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.
The idle speed is automatically increased
when the engine is cold this is to heat the
catalytic converter. This keeps the vehicle
emissions to an absolute minimum.
The idle speed will slowly decrease to the
normal level as the catalytic converter
warms up.
136
Starting and Stopping the Engine
During starting, the fuel injectors are turned
off as long as the accelerator pedal is
depressed. This can be used to drain
excessive fuel from the intake manifold
after several unsuccessful starting
attempts.
STARTING A PETROL ENGINE
- E85
For general information on starting a petrol
engine. See Starting a Petrol Engine
(page 136).
If the battery has been disconnected or
after the fuel type has been changed, the
idle speed may be irregular. This will
improve after 10 to 30 seconds.
Starting at low ambient
temperatures
When the temperature is lower than -10°C
(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, an
engine block heater should be used to
facilitate starting. See Engine Block
Heater (page 138). Failure to do this will
result in a non start.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
Cold or hot engine
All vehicles
If the temperature is expected to remain
below -10°C (14°F), it is recommended
that you increase the proportion of petrol
in the tank by topping up with 95 octane
unleaded petrol if the tank is not already
full. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrol
will reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾ full
tank from 85% to 70% and will
considerably improve cold start capability.
Note: When the temperature is below -15°C
(5°F), you may need to crank the engine for
up to 25 seconds.
Note: Continue cranking the engine until it
starts.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.
Switch the ignition on and wait
until the glow plug indicator goes
off.
If, at very low temperatures, the tank is
filled with only E85 and there is no way to
use an engine block heater, you may
experience difficulties starting the engine.
If the engine fails to start, proceed as
follows:
Vehicles with manual transmission
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
Vehicles with automatic transmission
Release the ignition key as soon as
the engine has started.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.
3. Gradually release the accelerator pedal
after five seconds of engine cranking
or as the engine speed rises.
If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2
and 3, or connect an engine block heater
for two hours before attempting another
start.
137
Starting and Stopping the Engine
If you drive only short distances or your
journeys contain frequent stopping and
starting, where there is increased
acceleration and deceleration, occasional
trips with the following conditions will
assist the regeneration process:
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The DPF forms part of the emissions
reduction systems fitted to your vehicle. It
filters harmful diesel particulates (soot)
from the exhaust gas.
•
Regeneration
WARNING
•
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The DPF
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after DPF regeneration, and
after you have switched the engine off.
This is a potential fire hazard.
•
•
Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,
preferably on a main road or motorway,
for up to 20 minutes.
Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
Do not switch off the ignition.
Use a lower gear than normal to
maintain a higher engine speed during
this journey, where appropriate.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
CAUTION
Vehicles with a turbocharger
Avoid running out of fuel.
CAUTION
Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odour and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to the high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: After you have switched your engine
off the fans may continue to run for a short
period of time.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
the engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.
Unlike a normal filter which requires
periodic replacement, the DPF has been
designed to regenerate, or clean itself to
maintain operating efficiency. The
regeneration process takes place
automatically. However, some driving
conditions mean that you may need to
support the regeneration process.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
CAUTION
Make sure you disconnect the power
cable from the engine heater
connector before driving away.
Note: The engine heater connector is
located in the radiator grille at the front of
your vehicle.
138
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E97918
Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3 hours
before starting the engine.
139
Start-Stop
Note: If you stall the engine, and then
depress the clutch pedal within a couple of
seconds, the system will automatically
restart the engine.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
CAUTION
For vehicles with Start-stop the
battery requirement is different. It
must be replaced by one of exactly
the same specification as the original.
Note: The Start-stop indicator will
illuminate green when the engine shuts
down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 81).
Note: The Start-stop indicator will flash
amber, requiring you to select neutral or
depress the clutch pedal. In conjunction a
message will be shown in the display.
The system reduces fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions by shutting down the
engine when the vehicle is idling, for
example at traffic lights. The engine will
automatically restart when the driver
presses the clutch pedal or when required
by a vehicle system, for example to
recharge the battery.
Note: If the system detects a malfunction,
it is deactivated. Have the system checked
by a properly trained technician.
Note: If you have switched the system off,
the switch will be illuminated.
To obtain maximum benefit from the
system, move the gear lever to the neutral
position and release the clutch pedal
during any stop of longer than three
seconds.
Note: The system is on by default. To
switch the system off, press the switch in
the instrument panel. The system will only
be de-activated for the current ignition
cycle. To turn it on, press the switch again.
For item location. See At a Glance (page
11).
USING START-STOP
WARNINGS
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system. See Principle of Operation
(page 140).
To stop the engine
Switch the ignition off before
opening the bonnet or carrying out
any maintenance.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the gear lever to the neutral
position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have shut down the engine but
the ignition will still be live.
The system may not shut down the engine
under certain conditions, for example:
Note: The system only operates when the
engine is warm and the outside temperature
is between 0°C (32°F) and 30°C (86°F).
•
•
•
•
140
To maintain the interior climate.
Low battery voltage.
The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
The driver's door has been opened.
Start-Stop
•
•
•
•
Low engine operating temperature.
Low brake system vacuum.
If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has
not been exceeded.
The driver's seat belt has not been
fastened.
To re-start the engine
Note: The gear lever must be in the neutral
position.
Depress the clutch pedal.
The system may automatically restart the
engine under certain conditions, for
example:
•
•
Low battery voltage.
To maintain the interior climate.
141
Eco Mode
Anticipation
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Adjusting your vehicle speed and the
distance to other vehicles without the need
for heavy braking or acceleration will
improve fuel consumption.
The system assists the driver to drive more
efficiently by constantly monitoring
characteristics of gear changing,
anticipation of traffic conditions and
speeds on motorways and open roads.
Efficient speed
Note: These efficiency values do not result
in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might
vary as it is not only related to these driving
disciplines but also influenced by many
other factors such as short journeys and cold
starts.
Higher speeds use more fuel. Reducing
your cruising speed on open roads will
improve fuel consumption.
Type 2 and 3
The relevant information will be shown in
the display.
Note: Frequent short journeys, where the
engine does not fully warm up, will also
increase fuel consumption.
USING ECO MODE
The value of these characteristics is
represented by petals shown in the display,
with five petals being the most efficient.
The more efficiently you drive, the better
the rating, and the better your overall fuel
consumption.
The system is accessed using the relevant
information display menu. See
Information Displays (page 85).
Resetting Eco mode
Type 1
Reset the average fuel consumption.
Note: New values may take a short time to
calculate.
E121813
A
B
A
Gear shifting
B
Anticipation
C
Efficient speed
C
Gear shifting
Using the highest drivable gear appropriate
for the road conditions will improve fuel
consumption.
142
Fuel and Refuelling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTIONS
Do not use leaded petrol or petrol with
additives containing other metallic
compounds (e.g. manganese-based).
They could damage the emission system.
WARNINGS
Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzle
stops the second time. Additional
fuel will fill the expansion space in
the fuel tank which could lead to fuel
overflowing. Fuel spillage could be
hazardous to other road users.
Do not use methanol instead of E85.
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel without additives or other
engine treatments.
Do not use any kind of flames or heat
near the fuel system. The fuel system
is under pressure. There is a risk of
injury if the fuel system is leaking.
Note: When using E85, you may experience
a higher fuel consumption.
CAUTION
Note: Your vehicle will operate well on
commercial quality 95 octane unleaded
petrol, but only high quality E85 offers the
same protection and performance.
Do not use leaded petrol or petrol with
additives containing other metallic
compounds (e.g. manganese-based).
They could damage the emission system.
Use minimum 95 octane unleaded
petrol that meets the specification defined
by EN 228, or equivalent. You can also use
a mixture of unleaded petrol and E85.
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel without additives or other
engine treatments.
Long-term storage
FUEL QUALITY - PETROL
Due to small amounts of corrosive
impurities that may be found in the E85, it
is recommended that you fill the tank with
only 95 octane unleaded petrol prior to
long-term storage of your vehicle.
Use minimum 95 octane unleaded petrol
that meets the specification defined by EN
228, or the equivalent national
specification.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL
Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol
blends up to 10% (E5 and E10).
WARNING
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Do not mix diesel with oil, petrol or
other liquids. This could cause a
chemical reaction.
WARNINGS
Do not modify the fuel system
configuration or the components in
the system.
CAUTIONS
Do not add kerosene, paraffin or
petrol to diesel. This could cause
damage to the fuel system.
Do not replace the fuel system or the
components with parts not specially
designed to be used with E85.
143
Fuel and Refuelling
CAUTIONS
Use diesel that meets the
specification defined by EN 590, or
the relevant national specification.
CAUTIONS
Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See
Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page
227).
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
Do not switch the ignition off when
driving.
Note: The use of additives or other engine
treatments not approved by Ford is not
recommended.
FUEL FILLER FLAP
Note: We do not recommend the prolonged
use of additives intended to prevent fuel
waxing.
WARNINGS
Take care when refuelling to avoid
spilling any residual fuel from the fuel
nozzle.
Long-term storage
Do not use any kind of flames or heat
near the fuel system. The fuel system
is under pressure. There is a risk of
injury if the fuel system is leaking.
Most diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it is
recommended to fill the tank with purely
mineral diesel (where available) or add an
anti-oxidant prior to long-term storage of
your vehicle exceeding two months. Your
dealer can help you with a suitable
anti-oxidant.
CAUTION
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel
filler flap briefly from a distance not
less than 200 millimetres (8 inches).
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Note: Central locking also locks and
unlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 38).
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during use, and after you have switched
the engine off. This is a potential fire
hazard.
Driving with a catalytic converter
CAUTIONS
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for long
periods.
E86613
1.
Do not run the engine when a spark
plug lead is disconnected.
144
Press the flap to open it. Open the flap
fully until it engages.
Fuel and Refuelling
A
A
B
E139203
E139202
Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, a
spring loaded inhibitor will open if the
correct size nozzle is detected. This helps
to avoid filling up with the wrong fuel.
A
Incorrect position
B
Correct position
3. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. This
can affect the flow of fuel and shut off of
the fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and
including the first notch on the nozzle
A. Keep it resting on the cover of the
fuel pipe opening.
WARNING
Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzle
stops the second time. Additional
fuel will fill the expansion space in
the fuel tank which could lead to fuel
overflowing. Fuel spillage could be
hazardous to other road users.
E139355
4. Operate the nozzle within the area
shown.
WARNINGS
We recommend that you remove the
fuel nozzle slowly to allow any
residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds
before removing the fuel nozzle.
Do not remove the nozzle from its
fully inserted position during the
entire refuelling process.
145
Fuel and Refuelling
REFUELLING - E85
CAUTION
Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have the system checked by a
properly trained technician immediately.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove
it.
After refuelling, allow 5 minutes of normal
engine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph)
to reduce the risk of an increased engine
restart time.
Refuelling with a fuel can
Use the funnel which is located in the spare
wheel well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
REFUELLING
The CO2 and fuel consumption figures are
derived from laboratory tests according to
EEC Directive 80/1268/EEC and
subsequent amendments and are carried
out by all vehicle manufacturers.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have the system checked by a
properly trained technician immediately.
They are intended as a comparison
between makes and models of vehicles.
They are not intended to represent the real
world fuel consumption you may get from
your vehicle. Real world fuel consumption
is governed by many factors including;
driving style, high speed driving, stop/start
driving, air conditioning usage, the
accessories fitted and towing etc.
Your Ford dealer can give you advice on
improving your fuel consumption.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
146
Fuel and Refuelling
4-door and 5-door
Fuel Consumption Figures
Urban
Extra-Urban
Combined
CO2 Emissions
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
g/km
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Stage IV (92kW/125PS), 5speed manual transmission
10 (28.2)
5.6 (50.4)
7.2 (39.2)
170
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Stage V (88kW/120PS), 5speed manual transmission
9.1 (31)
5.3 (53.3)
6.7 (42.2)
156
1.6L EcoBoost
(118kW/160PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
8.9 (31.7)
5.3 (53.3)
6.6 (42.8)
155
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4
Stage IV (107kW/145PS)
11.2 (25.2)
6 (47.1)
7.9 (35.8)
189
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4
Stage V (107kW/145PS)
11.3 (25)
6 (47.1)
8 (35.3)
184
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4
(149kW/203PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
10.4 (27.2)
6 (47.1)
7.6 (37.2)
176
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4
(177kW/240PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
10.4 (27.2)
6 (47.1)
7.6 (37.2)
176
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4
(149kW/203PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
10.7 (26.4)
6 (47.1)
7.7 (36.7)
179
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4
(177kW/240PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
10.9 (26.4)
6 (47.1)
7.7 (36.7)
179
2.3L Duratec-HE - MI4
(118kW/160PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
13.8 (20.5)
6.7 (42.2)
9.3 (30.4)
223
Variant
147
Fuel and Refuelling
Urban
Extra-Urban
Combined
CO2 Emissions
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
g/km
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
without start-stop
6 (47.1)
4.2 (67.3)
4.9 (57.6)
129
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission with
start-stop ECONETIC
5 (56.5)
3.9 (72.4)
4.3 (65.7)
114
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission with
start-stop
5.6 (50.4)
4.2 (67.3)
4.7 (60.1)
125
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage IV, 6-speed manual
transmission
7.5 (37.7)
4.8 (58.9)
5.8 (48.7)
154
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage V, 6-speed manual
transmission
6.1 (46.3)
4.2 (67.3)
4.9 (57.6)
129
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage IV (85kW/115PS), 6speed manual transmission
ECONETIC
6.4 (44.1)
4.6 (61.4)
5.3 (53.3)
139
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage IV (100kW/136PS),
6-speed automatic transmission
9.7 (29.1)
5.5 (51.4)
7.1 (39.8)
187
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage V, 6-speed automatic
transmission
7.2 (39.2)
4.7 (60.1)
5.6 (50.4)
149
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
(129kW/175PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
8.4 (33.6)
4.9 (57.6)
6.2 (45.6)
165
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
(147kW/200PS)
7.8 (36.2)
5 (56.5)
6 (47.1)
159
Variant
148
Fuel and Refuelling
Estate
Fuel Consumption Figures
Urban
Extra-Urban
Combined
CO2 Emissions
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
g/km
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Stage IV (92kW/125PS), 5speed manual transmission
10 (28.2)
5.6 (50.4)
7.2 (39.2)
170
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Stage V (88kW/120PS), 5speed manual transmission
9.1 (31)
5.3 (53.3)
6.7 (42.2)
156
1.6L EcoBoost
(118kW/160PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
8.9 (31.7)
5.3 (53.3)
6.6 (42.8)
155
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4
Stage IV (107kW/145PS)
11.2 (25.2)
6 (47.1)
7.9 (35.8)
189
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4
Stage V (107kW/145PS)
11.3 (25)
6 (47.1)
8 (35.3)
184
2.0L EcoBoost
(149kW/203PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
10.4 (27.2)
6 (47.1)
7.6 (37.2)
176
2.0L EcoBoost
(177kW/240PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
10.4 (27.2)
6 (47.1)
7.6 (37.2)
176
2.0L EcoBoost
(149kW/203PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
10.7 (26.4)
6 (47.1)
7.7 (36.7)
179
2.0L EcoBoost
(177kW/240PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
10.9 (26.4)
6 (47.1)
7.7 (36.7)
179
2.3L Duratec-HE
(118kW/160PS), 6-speed
automatic transmission
13.8 (20.5)
6.7 (42.2)
9.3 (30.4)
223
Variant
149
Fuel and Refuelling
Urban
Extra-Urban
Combined
CO2 Emissions
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
g/km
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
without start-stop
6 (47.1)
4.2 (67.3)
4.9 (57.6)
129
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission with
start-stop ECONETIC
5 (56.5)
3.9 (72.4)
4.3 (65.7)
114
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission with
start-stop
5.6 (50.4)
4.2 (67.3)
4.7 (60.1)
125
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage IV
7.5 (37.7)
4.8 (58.9)
5.8 (48.7)
154
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage V, 6-speed manual
transmission
6.1 (46.3)
4.2 (67.3)
4.9 (57.6)
129
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
(85kW/115PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
ECONETIC
6.4 (44.1)
4.6 (61.4)
5.3 (53.3)
139
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage IV (100kW/136PS),
6-speed automatic transmission
9.7 (29.1)
5.5 (51.4)
7.1 (39.8)
187
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
Stage V, 6-speed automatic
transmission
7.2 (39.2)
4.7 (60.1)
5.6 (50.4)
149
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
(129kW/175PS), 6-speed
manual transmission
8.4 (33.6)
4.9 (57.6)
6.2 (45.6)
165
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW
(147kW/200PS)
7.8 (36.2)
5 (56.5)
6 (47.1)
159
Variant
150
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
CAUTION
Do not engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is moving. This can cause
damage to the transmission.
N
Neutral
D
Drive
S
Sport mode and manual shifting
WARNING
Apply the brakes before moving the
selector lever and keep them applied
until you are ready to move off.
Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.
This will increase the tendency for your
vehicle to creep when you have selected a
drive gear.
Press the button on the selector lever to
select reverse and park.
The selector lever position will be shown
in the information display.
E99067
Park
On some vehicles it is necessary to raise
the collar whilst selecting reverse gear.
WARNINGS
Select park only when your vehicle
is stationary.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Apply the parking brake and
select park before leaving your
vehicle. Make sure that the selector
lever is latched in position.
Selector lever positions
Note: An audible warning will sound if you
open the driver's door and you have not
selected park.
In this position, power is not transmitted
to the drive wheels and the transmission
is locked. You can start the engine with the
selector lever in this position.
S
Reverse
WARNING
E80836
P
Park
R
Reverse
Select reverse only when your vehicle
is stationary and the engine is at idle
speed.
151
Transmission
Neutral
Drive modes
In this position, power is not transmitted
to the drive wheels but the transmission is
not locked. You can start the engine with
the selector lever in this position.
The transmission will select the
appropriate gear for optimum performance
based on ambient temperature, road
gradient, vehicle load and driver input.
Drive
Hints on driving with an automatic
transmission
Select drive to shift automatically through
the forward gears.
Moving off
Sport mode and manual shifting
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.
Stopping
1
1.
Release the accelerator pedal and
press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
S
Kickdown
2
Press the accelerator pedal fully with the
selector lever in the drive position to select
the next lowest gear for optimum
performance. Release the accelerator
pedal when you no longer require
kickdown.
S
E80837
Note: A shift will occur only when the
vehicle speed and the engine speed are
appropriate.
Emergency park position release
lever
Note: When you select position S, a gear
change may occur depending on the
accelerator pedal position in relation to
actual vehicle speed.
Use the lever to move the selector lever
from the park position in the event of an
electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has
a flat battery.
Activate sport mode by moving the
selector lever to position S. Sport mode
will remain active until you shift manually
up or down the gears.
Select manual shifting to shift manually
through the forward gears. Push the
selector lever forwards to shift down and
pull it backwards to shift up.
152
Transmission
E87934
1.
Remove the centre console side panel.
E87935
Note: The lever is yellow.
1.
Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into
the slot and turn the screwdriver
clockwise 90 degrees.
153
Brakes
The ABS will not eliminate the risks when:
• you drive too close to the vehicle in
front of you
• the vehicle is aquaplaning
• you take corners too fast
• the road surface is poor.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, the brake lamps
may flash if you brake heavily.
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal and
often does not indicate a concern. In normal
operation, the system may emit occasional
or intermittent squeal or groan noises when
the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually caused by environmental conditions
such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt
or mud.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission should always be left
with the selector lever in position P
(Park).
Disc brakes
Wet brake discs result in reduced braking
efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when
driving from a car wash to remove the film
of water.
•
•
•
ABS
•
WARNING
The ABS does not relieve you of your
responsibility to drive with due care
and attention.
•
The ABS helps you to maintain full steering
and directional stability when you brake
heavily in an emergency, by preventing the
road wheels from locking.
Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
Pull the parking brake lever up smartly
to its fullest extent.
Do not press the release button while
pulling the lever up.
If your vehicle is parked on a hill and
facing uphill, select first gear or P
(Park) and turn the steering wheel
away from the kerb.
If your vehicle is parked on a hill and
facing downhill, select reverse gear or
P (Park) and turn the steering wheel
towards the kerb.
To release the parking brake, press the
brake pedal firmly, pull the lever up slightly,
depress the release button and push the
lever down.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
154
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Stability control (ESP) warning lamp
Electronic stability programme
(ESP)
While driving, it flashes during activation
of the system. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 81).
WARNING
Emergency brake assist
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
The system will detect when you brake
heavily by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It will provide
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. The system can reduce
stopping distances in critical situations.
B
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
B
Note: The system will be switched on
automatically every time you switch the
ignition on.
A
A
B
A
Vehicles with stability control
(ESP) switch
E72903
A
Without ESP
B
With ESP
E71225
Press and hold the switch for one second.
The switch will illuminate. A message will
be shown in the display. See Information
Messages (page 98).
The system supports stability when the
vehicle starts to slide away from your
intended path. This is performed by braking
individual wheels and reducing engine
torque as needed.
Press the switch again to turn the system
on.
The system also provides an enhanced
traction control function by reducing
engine torque if the wheels spin when you
accelerate. This improves your ability to
pull away on slippery roads or loose
surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting
wheel spin in hairpin bends.
For item location: See At a Glance (page
11).
Vehicles without stability control
(ESP) switch
Turn the system off and on using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 85).
155
Hill Start Assist
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The system makes it easier to pull away
when the vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, the vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for a short
time after you release the brake pedal.
During this time, you have time to move
your foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal and pull away. The brakes are
released automatically once the engine
has developed sufficient drive to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down the slope.
This is an advantage when pulling away
on a slope, for example from a car park
ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill
into a parking space.
E70499
Hill Launch
Off
Auto
Manual
WARNING
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and select first or reverse gear.
USING HILL START ASSIST
E74629
The system can operate in either
automatic or manual mode. If you select
automatic mode, the system is activated
automatically when the vehicle is on a
slope and you press the brake pedal. If you
select manual mode, you must activate
the system using the brake pedal.
1.
2.
3.
To set the system mode:
4.
5.
156
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Hill Launch and press the
right arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
If Off is selected, the system is
switched off and cannot be activated
either automatically or manually.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. To return to the trip computer
display directly, hold the left arrow
button pressed.
Hill Start Assist
Note: When the system is in manual
activation mode, only use the system when
pulling away uphill on gradients greater than
3%. If the vehicle is on the flat or on a
downhill slope, an active system will make
it difficult to pull away smoothly.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is
on a slope and the right driving
direction is selected (first gear if the
vehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gear
if the vehicle is pointing downhill), the
system will be activated automatically.
Hill Launch Assist active will appear
in the display.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for
approximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator and
clutch pedal. The brakes will be
released automatically.
Activating the system
WARNINGS
You must remain in the vehicle once
you have activated the system. Any
attempt to leave the vehicle will
deactivate the system automatically.
The system is active only if the
message Hill Launch Assist active
is displayed in the information
display. During all times you are
responsible for controlling the vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
To activate the system in manual mode:
1.
Press the brake pedal to bring the
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal depressed.
2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further until
Hill Launch Assist active appears in
the display. The system is now active.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for
approximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator and
clutch pedal. The brakes will be
released automatically.
You can activate the system only if the
following conditions have been met:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The engine is running.
The system is switched on (automatic
or manual mode).
The parking brake is fully disengaged.
On vehicles with manual transmission,
the clutch pedal is pressed.
On vehicles with automatic
transmission, the driver door is closed.
No failure mode is present.
WARNING
When the system is active and the
system detects a failure, the system
is deactivated and the message
Please use park brake! followed by Hill
Launch A .not available will be displayed.
The vehicle is still safe to be driven and can
be repaired during the next service. The
message Hill Launch A. not available
will also be displayed with manual
activation during a failure or if one of the
activation criteria is not met. If you have
switched the system off, no messages will
be displayed.
To activate the system in automatic mode:
1.
Press the brake pedal to bring the
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal depressed.
157
Hill Start Assist
Deactivating the system
To deactivate the system, perform one of
the following:
•
•
•
•
Apply the parking brake.
Wait for two to three seconds until the
system deactivates automatically.
If a forward gear was selected when
the system became active, select
reverse gear.
If reverse gear was selected when the
system became active, select a
forward gear.
Hill Launch Assist off will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
158
Active suspension
System malfunction
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The active suspension system will switch
off automatically if it malfunctions. The
suspension will be set to a fail-safe
condition that will enable you to continue
driving but you will not be able to change
the suspension setting. Have this checked
as soon as possible.
The active suspension provides improved
handling, comfort and stability by
continuously adjusting the damper
properties to the current road and driving
conditions. This system in conjunction with
the ABS system offers the benefit of
potentially shorter stopping distances on
rough road surfaces.
Depending on your preferences and driving
style, you can choose between three
different settings:
Comfort
This provides a softer driving feel.
Normal
Normal setting.
Sport
This provides a harder, sportier ride.
USING ACTIVE SUSPENSION
Selecting a setting
Note: After you select a setting, you may
not immediately notice a difference in the
vehicle's handling. The effect of the
continuously controlled damping depends
on the road surface and driving conditions.
E70475
You can change the setting while driving.
159
Parking Aids
Note: The parking aid may emit false tones
if it detects a signal using the same
frequency as the sensors or if the vehicle is
fully laden.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The parking aid does not relieve you
of your responsibility to drive with
due care and attention.
Note: The outer sensors may detect the
side walls of a garage. If the distance
between the outer sensor and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
tone will switch off. As you continue, the
inner sensors will detect rearward objects.
CAUTIONS
Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow
module not approved by us may not
correctly detect obstacles.
PARKING AID
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Switching the parking aid on and
off
The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.
Note: The parking aid switches off
automatically when you start the engine or
when you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).
The parking aid does not detect
obstacles moving away from the
vehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move towards
the vehicle again.
Note: The front and rear sensors are always
activated or deactivated together.
The parking aid is per default off. To switch
the parking aid on, press the switch in the
instrument panel or select reverse gear.
Take particular care when reversing
with a tow ball arm or rear fitted
accessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as
the rear parking aid will only indicate the
distance from the bumper to the obstacle.
The light in the switch illuminates when
the parking aid is activated.
To turn it off, press the switch again.
Manoeuvring with the parking aid
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the
sensors briefly from a distance not
less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).
Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ball
arm, the parking aid is deactivated
automatically when any trailer lamps (or
lighting boards) are connected to the 13-pin
socket via a trailer tow module we have
approved.
E72902
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: If a high pitch warning tone sounds
for three seconds and the light in the switch
is flashing, it indicates a malfunction. The
system will be disabled. Have the system
checked by properly trained technicians.
160
Parking Aids
You will hear an intermittent tone at a
distance of up to approximately 150
centimetres (59 inches) between the
obstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres
(31 inches) between the obstacle and front
bumper and 50 centimetres (20 inches)
to the side. Decreasing the distance
accelerates the intermittent tone. A
continuous tone will start at a distance of
less than 30 centimetres (12 inches).
You will hear an alternating tone from the
front and rear if obstacles are closer than
30 centimetres (12 inches) to the front and
rear bumpers.
161
Rear view camera
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The camera is a visual aid for use when
reversing.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
CAUTIONS
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the
camera briefly from a distance not
less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).
E99105
Activating the rear view camera
Do not apply pressure to the camera.
CAUTION
The camera may not detect objects
that are close to the vehicle.
Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, ice
and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects,
degreaser, wax or organic products. Use only
a soft cloth.
With the ignition and the audio unit
switched on, engage reverse gear. The
image is displayed on the screen.
During operation, guide lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle's path
and approximate distance from rearward
objects.
The camera may not operate correctly in
the following conditions:
• Dark areas.
• Intense light.
• If the ambient temperature increases
or decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example in rain
or high humidity.
• If the camera's view is obstructed, for
example by mud.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The operation of the camera may
vary depending on the ambient
temperature, vehicle and road
conditions.
The distances shown in the display
may differ from the actual distance.
Using the display
CAUTIONS
Obstacles above the camera position
will not be shown. Inspect the area
behind your vehicle if necessary.
Do not place objects in front of the
camera.
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment lid near the handle.
162
Rear view camera
D
CAUTIONS
Marks are for general guidance only,
and are calculated for vehicles in
maximum load conditions on an even
road surface.
The lines show a projected vehicle path
(based on the current steering wheel
angle) and the distance from the exterior
mirrors and rear bumper.
E
D
C
C
B
B
A
A
E99458
163
A
Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1
metre (4 inches)
B
Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches)
C
Amber - 1 metre (39 inches)
Rear view camera
D
Amber - 2 metres (79 inches)
E
Amber - centre line of the
projected vehicle path
Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines
on the screen show the vehicle direction and
not the trailer.
Deactivating the rear view camera
Note: Disengage reverse gear. The display
will stay on for a short period before
switching off.
The system will automatically switch off
once the vehicle speed has reached
approximately 15 km/h (9 mph).
Vehicles with parking aid
The display will additionally show a
coloured distance bar. This guide indicates
the distance from the rear bumper to the
detected obstacle.
These are colour coded as follows:
• Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59
inches).
• Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31
inches).
• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.
164
Cruise Control
Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch
to store and maintain your current speed.
The cruise control indicator illuminates.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control allows you to control your
speed using the switches on the steering
wheel. You can use cruise control when
you exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).
Changing the set speed
WARNING
When you are going downhill, your
speed may increase above the set
speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear and press the
RES switch to assist the system in
maintaining the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on twisty roads or when the
road surface is slippery.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that you
previously set.
Switching cruise control on
Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch
to accelerate or decelerate.
Cancelling the set speed
E70612
Setting a speed
E70614
Press the brake pedal or the CAN switch.
The system will no longer control your
speed. The cruise control indicator will go
off but the system will retain the speed
that you previously set.
E70615
165
Cruise Control
Resuming the set speed
E70616
Press the RES switch. The cruise control
indicator illuminates and the system will
attempt to resume the speed that you
previously set.
Switching cruise control off
E70613
Press the OFF switch. The system will not
retain the speed that you previously set.
The cruise control indicator will go off.
166
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
activated, you may hear some unusual
sounds during automatic braking. This is
normal and caused by the automatic
braking system.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system is not a collision warning
or avoidance system. The separate
forward alert function provides a
collision warning and mitigation feature.
See Forward alert function (page 172).
You must intervene if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front.
Note: Keep the front of the vehicle free
from dirt, metal badges or objects, including
vehicle front protectors and additional lights
which may prevent the sensor from
operating.
The system is designed to help you
maintain a gap from the vehicle ahead or
a set road speed if there is no slower
vehicle ahead. The system is intended to
provide enhanced operation of the vehicle
when following other vehicles which are in
the same lane and travelling in the same
direction.
When driving you are responsible for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when adaptive cruise
control is used. You must always pay
attention to the traffic conditions and
intervene when adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or
suitable distance.
The system is based on the use of a radar
sensor which projects a beam directly
forward of the vehicle. This beam will
detect any vehicle ahead within the
system's range.
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
The system does not brake for slow
or stationary vehicles, pedestrians,
objects in the road, oncoming and
crossing vehicles.
The radar sensor is mounted behind the
front grille.
CAUTIONS
Only use adaptive cruise control when
conditions are favourable, for example
on motorways and main roads with
steady free flowing traffic.
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, heavy rain, spray or
snow.
Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
Do not use the system when entering
or leaving a motorway.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may
detect a vehicle other than the one
expected or not detect any vehicle at all.
167
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Detection beam issues
Automatic braking with ACC
WARNINGS
You must take immediate action
once alerted, as the adaptive cruise
control braking will not be sufficient
to keep a safe distance to the vehicle in
front.
In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be
delayed. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary.
When following a vehicle in front of
you, adaptive cruise control will not
automatically decelerate to a stop.
The system will automatically brake for
you, if required to maintain the set gap
between your vehicle and the one detected
in front. This braking capacity is limited to
approximately 30% of the total manual
braking capacity to ensure smooth and
comfortable cruising. If the car needs to
brake more heavily than this, and you do
not intervene by braking manually, an
alarm will sound and a warning symbol will
be displayed in the cluster.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
•
•
With vehicles that edge into your lane
that can only be detected once they
have moved fully into your lane (A).
Motorcycles may be detected late, or
not at all. (B)
With vehicles in front when going into
and coming out of a bend (C). The
detection beam will not follow sharp
curves in the road.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
The system is operated by adjustment
controls mounted on the steering wheel.
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.
168
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Vehicles without speed limiter
A
E
D
ACC gap increase
E
ACC gap decrease
Switching the system on
Press switch A. The system is set to
standby mode.
B
Setting a speed
D
Note: The system must be in standby
mode.
C
F
E124908
A
ACC on
B
ACC cancel
C
ACC off
D
ACC gap increase
E
ACC gap decrease
G
E133884
Vehicles with speed limiter
A
E
F
Set speed increase
G
Set speed decrease
Press switch F or switch G to select your
desired cruise speed. The speed is
displayed in the information display and
stored as the set speed.
B
Changing the set speed
D
Note: Vehicle speed may be increased and
decreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph.
C
Note: If the system does not react to these
changes the reason may be that the gap
interval to the vehicle in front prevents an
increase in speed.
E124909
A
ACC on/off
B
ACC cancel
C
Speed limiter on/off
169
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Note: The gap setting is time dependant
and therefore the distance will
automatically adjust with your speed. For
example on a gap setting of four bars, the
time gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean that
at a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), the
distance to the vehicle in front will be
maintained at 50 metres (164 feet).
F
G
Note: If the accelerator is depressed for a
short period, for example when overtaking,
the system is temporarily deactivated and
then reactivated when the accelerator pedal
is released. A message is displayed in the
information display.
E133884
Press switch F to increase or switch G to
decrease the set speed until the desired
set speed is shown in the information
display. The vehicle speed will gradually
change to the selected speed.
Note: The gap setting will remain
unchanged during ignition cycles.
Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1 mph
may be set by pressing switch H.
H
E82311
The distance between you and the vehicle
detected in front is maintained by a
variable setting. There are five steps which
are represented by horizontal bars
displayed in the information display. One
bar denotes the smallest gap and five bars
indicate the largest gap. These bars are
shown empty when in standby mode and
filled when in active mode.
E133885
H
ACC resume
If no vehicle is detected in front, then only
your vehicle is displayed in the information
display below the bars. The system will
maintain the set speed when conditions
permit. The set gap is maintained and
displayed.
Setting the vehicle gap
CAUTION
Use the appropriate gap setting in
accordance with local traffic
regulations.
If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, the
display will show another vehicle above
the horizontal bars:
170
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Vehicles with speed limiter
Press switch A to turn the system off.
Note: When deactivating the system by
pressing switch A, the stored speed is not
retained.
Automatic deactivation
E82312
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, a
message is displayed in the information
display instructing you to change down a
gear (manual transmission only). If you do
not follow this recommendation then the
system will go into automatic deactivation
mode.
This is a follow mode, and the system will
accelerate or decelerate as necessary to
maintain the set gap.
Press switch E to decrease the gap or
switch D to increase the gap. The gap
selected will be represented by the number
of bars in the display.
Note: The system will not operate if the
electronic stability programme (ESP) has
been manually switched off.
Note: The recommended gap setting is four
to five bars.
The system is dependent on various other
safety systems, for example ABS and ESP.
If any of these systems are malfunctioning
or reacting to an emergency, the system is
automatically deactivated.
Temporarily deactivating the
system
Note: The system is cancelled when the
gear lever is moved to a neutral position or
if the accelerator pedal or clutch is
depressed for a long period of time
In the event of automatic deactivation a
signal will sound and the message is
displayed in the information display See
Information Messages (page 98). You
must then intervene and adapt your driving
and speed to vehicles in front.
Press either the brake or switch B to cancel
the system. The system will return to
standby mode allowing you full manual
control of the vehicle. The set speed and
gap setting are retained in the memory.
An automatic deactivation can be due to
the:
To resume adaptive cruise control press
switch H. The system will resume with the
previously set speed and vehicle gap
setting if conditions permit.
•
•
•
Switching the system off
Vehicles without speed limiter
•
•
•
Press switch C to turn the system off.
Note: When deactivating the system by
pressing switch C, the stored speed is not
retained.
171
vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h
(20 mph)
wheels losing traction
brake temperature is high, for example
when driving on mountainous or hilly
roads
engine speed is too low
radar sensor is covered
parking brake or electric parking brake
(EPB) is applied.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION
The system assists you by warning of the
risk of a collision with a vehicle in front.
WARNINGS
Never wait for a collision warning.
When driving you are responsible for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the system is used.
The system alerts you by warning chimes
and a visual warning in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 98).
Brake support is activated to enable full
braking effectiveness, and reduce the
severity of a collision with the vehicle in
front.
The system will only react to vehicles
in front travelling in the same
direction and will not react to slow
or stationary vehicles.
Switching the system on and off
Never drive in a manner to provoke
the system. The system is designed
to assist in emergencies only.
Note: When the system is switched off, a
warning indicator will remain illuminated in
the information display. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 81).
CAUTIONS
Warnings may be triggered late, be
absent or triggered unnecessarily due
to detection beam issues. See
Principle of Operation (page 167).
Note: The system status and settings will
remain unchanged during ignition cycles.
The system can be switched on and off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 85).
The system uses the same radar
sensors as adaptive cruise control and
therefore has the same limitations.
See Principle of Operation (page 167).
Adjusting the warning sensitivity
You may adjust the system warning
sensitivity using the buttons on the steering
wheel. See General Information (page
85). This controls how early the visual and
audible warning is activated.
Note: The brake support system only
reduces the collision speed if you brake
immediately once alerted.
Note: If the brake pedal is depressed
sufficiently quickly then braking is
implemented with full brake function, even
if the force on the pedal is light.
Note: Brake support prepares the brake
system for rapid braking and the brakes are
applied gently, which may be noticed as a
slight jerk.
Note: The collision alerts will only occur if
the system is switched on, however the
brake support is always on and cannot be
turned off.
Note: The system may be used with or
without the Adaptive cruise control system
being activated.
172
Speed Limiter
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
When you are going downhill, your
speed may increase above the set
speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning will be given.
The system allows you to set a speed, to
which the vehicle then becomes limited.
The set speed will become the effective
maximum speed of the vehicle, but with
the option to temporarily exceed this limit
if required.
E70615
Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch
to select your desired speed limit. The
speed is indicated in the information
display and stored as the set speed.
USING THE SPEED LIMITER
Press button B to cancel the limiter and
place it in standby mode. The information
display will confirm deactivation by
showing the set speed crossed out.
The system is operated by adjustment
controls mounted on the steering wheel.
Press button A to switch the system on
and off. The information display will
prompt for a speed to be set.
Note: The set speed limit can be
intentionally exceeded for a short period if
required, for example when overtaking.
B
E70616
Press the RES button to resume the
limiter. The information display will confirm
the system is active by showing the set
speed again.
Intentionally exceeding the speed
limit
A
Depress the accelerator hard close to the
full pedal travel and the limit will
temporarily deactivate. The system will
reactivate once the vehicle speed drops
below the set speed.
E124874
Setting the speed limit
Use the cruise control switches to alter the
maximum speed setting.
173
Speed Limiter
System warnings
If the set limit is accidentally exceeded the
information display will show the set speed
flashing together with an audible warning
chime.
If the set limit is intentionally exceeded the
information display will show the set speed
crossed out.
174
Driver Alert
Note: Keep the windscreen free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system is intended as a driver aid
when driving on fast main roads and
motorways.
Note: The system calculates an alertness
level at vehicle speeds above approximately
65 km/h (40 mph).
At all times you are responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behaviour using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
Take regular rest breaks as required
and do not wait for the system to
warn you if you feel tired.
If the system detects that you are
becoming drowsy or there is a deterioration
in your driving, the system will alert you.
Take rest breaks only where it is safe
to do so.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Certain driving styles and behaviour
may result in the system issuing a
warning even if you are not feeling
Switching the system on and off
Note: The system status will remain
unchanged during ignition cycles.
tired.
Activate the system using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
85).
CAUTIONS
In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. Rain,
snow, spray and large contrasts in
lighting can all influence the sensor.
Once activated the system will calculate
your alertness level based upon your
driving behaviour in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
System warnings
The system may not operate in areas
during roadworks construction.
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).
The system may not operate on roads
with sharp bends or narrow lanes.
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that a rest should be taken. This message
will only appear for a short time. If a rest is
not then taken a further warning may be
issued which will remain in the information
display until cancelled. See Information
Messages (page 98).
Do not carry out windscreen repairs in
the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
If your vehicle is fitted with a
suspension kit not approved by us, the
system may not function correctly.
Press OK on the steering wheel control to
remove the warning.
175
Driver Alert
System display
Resetting the system
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue warnings if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 85).
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver's door.
The alertness level is shown by six steps
as a coloured bar.
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required.
E131359
Alertness level is critical, indicating that a
rest should be taken as soon as safely
possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the colour turns from green to yellow and
then finally red when a rest break must be
taken.
•
•
•
Green - No rest required.
Yellow - First (temporary) warning.
Red - Second warning.
Note: The alertness level will be shown in
grey if the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if the vehicle speed
drops below approximately 65 km/h (40
mph).
176
Lane Departure Warning
Note: The system is intended as a driver aid
when driving on fast main roads and
motorways.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system may not operate during
hard braking or acceleration and, when you
are intentionally steering the vehicle.
Note: The system will operate with a
minimum of one tracked lane marking.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
Note: The system will only operate above
vehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h
(40 mph).
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
A sensor is mounted behind the interior
rear view mirror. It continuously monitors
conditions to alert you of unintentional
lane drifting at high speeds.
Lane markings may not always be
properly tracked by the sensor. Other
structures or objects may sometimes
be incorrectly detected as a lane marking,
resulting in a false or missed warning.
The system will automatically detect and
track the lane markings on the road. If it
detects that the vehicle is unintentionally
drifting towards the lane boundaries then
a visual warning will be displayed in the
information display. There is also a warning
given in the form of a vibration felt through
the steering wheel.
CAUTIONS
In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. Rain,
snow, spray and large contrasts in
lighting can all influence the sensor.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
USING LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING
The system may not operate in areas
during roadworks construction.
Switching the system on and off
The system may not operate on roads
with sharp bends or narrow lanes.
Note: When the system is switched off, a
warning indicator will remain illuminated in
the information display. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 81).
Do not carry out windscreen repairs in
the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
Note: The system status and settings will
remain unchanged during ignition cycles.
If your vehicle is fitted with a
suspension kit not approved by us, the
system may not function correctly.
Note: Keep the windscreen free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
177
Lane Departure Warning
The lane markings are colour coded as
follows:
• Green - The system is ready to warn
you of any unintentional lane
departure.
• Red - The vehicle is approaching or is
too close to the detected lane
boundary. Take immediate safe action
to reposition the vehicle.
• Grey - The relevant lane boundary will
be suppressed.
A
B
E131360
A
System on
B
System off
Instances where a lane boundary may be
suppressed:
• Lane markings on the road may not be
detected by the sensor.
• The direction indicator for that side of
the vehicle is on.
• During hard acceleration and braking,
or if direct steering is applied.
• Vehicle speed is outside the operating
limits
• If there is an ABS or Stability Control
(ESP) intervention.
• Narrow lane width.
Activate the system using the switches on
the indicator stalk.
Setting the steering wheel
vibration level
The system has three intensity levels which
can be set using the information display.
See General Information (page 85).
Setting the system sensitivity
You can adjust how quickly the system
warns you of a dangerous situation. The
system has two sensitivity levels which can
be set using the information display. See
General Information (page 85).
If the lane markings turn red or a vibration
is felt through the steering wheel you must
take immediate and safe action to align
the vehicle and correct any unintended
lane drift.
System warnings
E131363
A column of lane markings is displayed
either side of the vehicle graphic.
178
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Use load securing straps to an
approved standard, e.g. DIN.
Make sure that you secure all loose
items properly.
Place luggage and other loads as low
and as far forward as possible within
the luggage or loadspace.
Do not drive with the tailgate or rear
door open. Exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle.
E97377
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
Do not exceed the maximum front
and rear axle loads for your vehicle.
See Vehicle identification (page
Estate
244).
Heavy loads, when placed in the
passenger compartment, should be
on folded rear seats as shown. See
Rear Seats (page 124).
CAUTIONS
Do not allow items to contact the rear
windows.
Do not use any abrasive materials to
clean the interior of the rear windows.
Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
E86912
179
Load Carrying
4-door and 5-door
E74810
Press the unlocking handle and pull the
loadspace floor rearwards. It will stop and
engage at a midway position.
E86913
SLIDING LOADSPACE FLOOR
WARNING
Do not slide the loadspace floor
rearwards when the vehicle is
standing on an incline of 15 degrees
or more and facing uphill.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible weight on
the sliding loadspace floor is 200
kilogrammes (441 pounds).
The maximum permissible weight on the
end of the sliding loadspace floor when
the floor is in the fully extended position
(slid outside the luggage compartment)
is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds).
E74811
To slide it out fully, press the unlocking
handle again and pull it out until it engages
in the end position.
To slide it forwards, press the unlocking
handle and push it forwards.
Note: You do not have to exert as much
pressure on the unlocking handle if you push
the loadspace floor forwards slightly when
operating it.
180
Load Carrying
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located in the
floor at the rear of the luggage
compartment.
To gain access to the storage
compartment, lift up the sliding loadspace
floor as follows:
2
3
1
E74812
E74813
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the unlocking handle and pull the
loadspace floor rearwards a short way.
Lift up the rear of the floor (1).
Push the floor forwards until it engages
at the front (2).
Release the support leg from the clip
on the underside of the floor.
Insert the end into the square retainer
in the left-hand rail (3).
Lift the storage compartment cover
using the loop.
To return the loadspace floor to the normal
position:
1.
Hold the floor with one hand and
release the support leg with the other
hand.
2. Insert the support leg back into the clip.
181
Load Carrying
3. Lower the floor.
4. Press the unlocking handle and pull the
loadspace floor rearwards until it drops
into position on the rails.
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Vehicles with a sliding loadspace
floor
Raise the loadspace floor to gain access
to the storage compartment. See Sliding
Loadspace Floor (page 180).
Vehicles without a sliding
loadspace floor
E112571
Pull out the cover until it locks.
E87689
LUGGAGE COVERS
E112572
WARNING
Release it from the retaining points by
pressing below the handle. Let it roll slowly
back into the case.
Do not place objects on the luggage
cover.
182
Load Carrying
CARGO NETS
Luggage retention net
Installing the net
E112588
To remove or install the cover, push either
end of the case inwards.
Stowing the luggage cover - Estate
without full size spare wheel
E87052
1.
Push the ends of the upper bar towards
each other and insert them into the
retainers on the roof. Push the bar
forwards into the narrow section of the
retainers.
E134798
Space is provided under the luggage
compartment floor.
E87053
2. Attach the net to the luggage anchor
points. See Luggage Anchor Points
(page 179).
183
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
Roof rack
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuel
consumption of your vehicle will be
higher and you may experience
different driving characteristics.
Read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
E87054
CAUTION
3. Tighten the belts.
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible roof load of 75
kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including
the roof rack).
Removing the net
Check the security of the roof rack and
tighten its fittings as follows:
•
•
•
before starting
after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)
at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)
intervals.
To minimise windnoise when the roof rack
is not in use, cross rails should be moved
rearwards and placed together. To reduce
fuel consumption, cross rails should be
removed when not in use.
E87135
1. Release the belts.
2. Remove the net from the luggage
anchor points.
3. Remove the upper bars.
DOG GUARD
CAUTION
Keep a distance of at least one
centimetre between the dog guard
and the seats in front of it.
184
Load Carrying
Installing behind the front seats
E86848
1.
E87783
Push the ends of the bar on the grille
towards each other and insert them
into the retainers on the roof. Push the
bar forwards into the narrow section
of the retainers.
3. Attach the grille to the lower bar with
the handwheels. Do not tighten the
handwheels.
4. Tighten the screws at the lower anchor
points.
5. Tighten the handwheels.
Installing behind the rear seats
E87782
2. Attach the dog guard to the lower
anchor points. Do not tighten the
screws.
E86848
185
Load Carrying
1.
Push the ends of the bar on the grille
towards each other and insert them
into the retainers on the roof. Push the
bar forwards into the narrow section
of the retainers.
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible load of 60 kilogrammes
(132 pounds) on two load retaining
fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds)
on one.
Check the security of the load retaining
fixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:
•
•
•
before starting
after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)
at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)
intervals.
Installing the load retaining
fixtures
E104424
2. Remove two screws from both the
luggage anchor points. See Luggage
Anchor Points (page 179).
3. Attach the lower bar to the grille with
the handwheels. Do not tighten the
handwheels.
4. Attach the dog guard lower bar to the
luggage anchor points, secure with the
new supplied screws.
5. Tighten the handwheels.
E75003
Remove in the reverse order.
186
Load Carrying
Installing the load bracket
4. Slide the captured bolts onto the load
retaining fixture.
WARNINGS
Install the load bracket with the
longest section towards the rear of
the vehicle. If you install it the wrong
way round, it may not hold the box in place
in the event of an accident.
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible load of 20 kilogrammes
(44 pounds).
3
3
2
1
E76380
5. Secure the load bracket with the two
wing nuts.
6. Remove in the reverse order.
E76378
1. Turn the box over.
2. Position the load bracket.
3. Secure the load bracket with four
screws.
E76379
187
Towing
Change down a gear before you reach a
steep downhill gradient.
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).
TOW BALL
WARNINGS
When not in use, always transport
the tow ball arm securely fastened
in the luggage compartment.
The rear tyre pressures must be
increased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) above
specification. See Technical
Specifications (page 240).
Take special care when fitting the
tow ball arm as the safety of the
vehicle and the trailer depends on
Do not exceed the maximum gross
train weight stated on the vehicle
identification plate. See Vehicle
identification (page 244).
this.
Do not use any tools for mounting or
dismounting the tow ball arm. Do not
modify the trailer coupling. Do not
disassemble or repair the tow ball arm.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible nose weight, i.e. vertical
weight on the tow ball, of 90
kilogrammes (198 pounds).
Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or
approved to have tow bars fitted. Check
with your dealer first.
Place loads as low and central to the
axle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you are
towing with an unladen vehicle, the load
in the trailer should be placed toward the
nose, within the maximum nose load, as
this gives the best stability.
E71328
A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball arm
seat are provided underneath the rear
bumper. Turn the trailer socket down
through 90 degrees until it engages in the
end position.
The stability of the vehicle to trailer
combination is very much dependant on
the quality of the trailer.
In high altitude regions above 1 000 metres
(3 281 feet), the stipulated maximum
permitted gross train weight must be
reduced by 10% for every additional 1 000
metres (3 281 feet).
Steep gradients
WARNING
The overrun brake on a trailer is not
controlled by ABS.
188
Towing
Inserting the tow ball arm
Unlocking the tow ball arm
mechanism
3
1
1
2
E71329
1.
Remove the protecting cap (1). Insert
the key and turn it clockwise to unlock
(2).
2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the
handwheel out and turn it clockwise
until it clicks (3).
3. The red mark on the handwheel must
align with the green mark on the tow
ball.
4. Release the handwheel. The tow ball
arm is unlocked.
2
E71330
WARNING
The tow ball arm may only be
inserted when completely unlocked.
1. Pull out the plug.
2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and
press it upwards until it engages (1).
Do not hold your hand near the
handwheel.
3. The green mark on the handwheel
must align with the green mark on the
tow ball.
4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwise and
remove the key (2).
5. Pull the protecting cap from the key
bow and press it onto the lock.
189
Towing
Driving with a trailer
Removing the tow ball arm
A
3
B
E71331
2
WARNING
If any of the below conditions cannot
be met, do not use the tow bar and
have it checked by a properly trained
technician.
1
Before starting your journey, make sure
that the tow ball arm is properly locked.
Check that:
•
•
•
•
E71332
1. Unhitch the trailer.
2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the
cap into the key bow. Insert the key and
unlock (1).
3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the
handwheel out, turn it clockwise
against the stop (2) and remove the
tow ball arm (3).
4. Release the handwheel.
the green marks are aligned
the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted
to the tow ball arm
you have removed the key (B)
the tow ball arm is securely positioned.
It must not move when jerked.
When unlocked in this way, the tow ball
arm can be reinserted at any time.
190
Towing
Driving without a trailer
1
E94771
1. Remove the tow ball arm.
2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).
WARNING
Never unlock the tow ball arm with
the trailer attached.
Maintenance
WARNING
Remove the tow ball arm and
protect the seat with the plug before
steam cleaning your vehicle.
Keep the system clean. Periodically
lubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, and
locking balls with resin-free grease or oil
and the lock with graphite.
In case of loss, replacement keys are
available from the manufacturer by stating
the number on the lock cylinder.
191
Driving Hints
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
RUNNING-IN
Tyres
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -30°C (-22°F).
WARNING
New tyres need to be run-in for
approximately 500 kilometres (300
miles). During this time, you may
experience different driving characteristics.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water
Brakes and clutch
CAUTIONS
Drive through water in an emergency
only, and not as part of normal driving.
WARNING
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and
clutch if possible for the first 150
kilometres (100 miles) in town and
for the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles)
on motorways.
Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
In an emergency, the vehicle can be driven
through water to a maximum depth of 200
millimetres (8 inches) and at a maximum
speed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra caution
should be exercised when driving through
flowing water.
Engine
CAUTION
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1500 kilometres (1000 miles). Vary
your speed frequently and change up
through the gears early. Do not labour the
engine.
When driving in water, maintain a low
speed and do not stop the vehicle. After
driving through water, and as soon as it is
safe to do so:
• Depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is
achieved.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the vehicle's lights are fully
operational.
• Check the power assistance
of the steering system.
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS VEHICLES WITH: SPORTS
SUSPENSION
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is reduced
compared to other models. Drive with
extreme care to avoid damage to your
vehicle.
192
Roadside Emergencies
Estate
FIRST AID KIT
Space is provided in the luggage
compartment.
4-door
E87656
WARNING TRIANGLE
4-door and 5-door
E87654
5-door
E87657
E87655
Space is provided in the luggage
compartment.
Estate and vehicles with tyre repair
kit
Space is provided under the carpet.
See Rear Under Floor Storage (page 182).
193
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine compartment fuse box
E72590
2. Remove the cover.
E72588
3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees and
release the fuse box from the retaining
bracket.
Central fuse box
4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull it
towards you.
All vehicles
5. Install in the reverse order.
Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door
1
E72589
1. Pinch the retaining clips to release the
cover.
E87481
1.
194
Remove the cover.
Fuses
3
2
3
3
E87482
E87480
2. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.
3. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.
Rear fuse box - Estate
CHANGING A FUSE
WARNINGS
Do not modify the electrical system
of your vehicle in any way. Have
repairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays and high current
fuses carried out by a properly trained
technician.
1
Switch the ignition and all electrical
equipment off before touching or
attempting to change a fuse.
2
CAUTION
E87479
Fit a replacement fuse with the same
rating as the one you have removed.
1. Release the catches.
2. Remove the cover.
Note: You can identify a blown fuse by a
break in the filament.
Note: All fuses, except high current fuses,
are a push fit.
Note: A fuse puller is located in the engine
compartment fuse box.
195
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine compartment fuse box
E75525
Fuse
Ampere rating
F1
10
Transmission control module (AWF21)
Circuits protected
F1
15
Transmission control module (MPS6)
F2
5
Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)
196
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
F2
5
Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
Stage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F3
70
1
Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic)
1
F3
80
Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 2.0L
EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F4
60
Glow plugs
60
Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L DuratorqTDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
manual, 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 2.0L
Duratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE, 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi)
F5
F5
70
Engine cooling fan - twin fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)
F6
7.5
HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
F6
10
HEGO sensors 1, CMS sensor, Oxygen sensor (engine
management)
F6
20
Vaporiser glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F7
5
Relay coils
F8
10
Powertrain control module, Fuel metering unit, MAF
sensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (engine
management).
F8
20
Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F8
15
Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F9
10
MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors, Variable Intake Valve,
Variable Exhaust Valve, ignition coils (engine
management).
F9
5
Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F9
7.5
MAF Sensor, EGR bypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser
(2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (engine management)
197
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
F9
7.5
Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter, bypass
valve, relay coil, auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L
EcoBoost SCTi).
F10
10
Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V)
F10
7.5
Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)
F11
10
PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, Sonic
Purge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve,
EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine management). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve,
active grille shutter, cannister purge valve, turbo control
valve, waste gate valve (engine management).
F11
10
Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter,
EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
F11
5
MAF sensor, Water in Fuel Sensor, Active grille shutter,
inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V).
F11
7.5
Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, fuel pump
vaporiser, active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Stage V)
F11
10
Turbo control valve, variable intake timing valve, variable exhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve,
electrical bypass valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).
F12
15
Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoost
SCTi)
F12
10
Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power Steering
Pressure Switch (engine management)
F12
10
EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L DuratorqTDCi)
F12
5
Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
F13
15
Air conditioning
F14
15
Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L DuratorqTDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
F14
10
HEGO sensor (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F15
40
Starter relay
198
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
F16
80
Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)
F17
60
Central fuse box supply A
F18
60
Central fuse box supply B
F19
60
Rear fuse box supply C
F20
60
Rear fuse box supply D
F21
30
VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR
F22
30
Windscreen wiper module
F23
30
Heated rear window
F24
30
Headlamp washer
F25
30
ABS valves
F26
40
ABS pump
F27
25
Fuel fired heater
F28
40
Heater blower
F29
–
Not used
F30
5
ABS 30 feed
F31
15
Horn
F32
5
Fuel fired heater - remote control
F33
5
Light switch module, engine compartment fuse box
coils
F34
40
Heated windscreen (left-hand side)
F35
40
Heated windscreen (right-hand side)
F36
15
Rear wiper 15 feed
F37
7.5
Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL15
F38
10
PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed
F39
15
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)
F40
5
Headlamp levelling / AFS module
F41
20
Instrument panel
199
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
F42
5
Cluster IP
F43
15
Audio/BVC module/DAB module
F44
5
Automatic AC / Manual AC
F45
5
FLR (Start Stop)
1
Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.
Central fuse box
A
B
E124888
200
Fuses
A
Left-hand drive
B
Right-hand drive
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
F1
7.5
F2
5
Cluster
Steering wheel module
F3
10
Interior lamps
F4
5
Engine immobiliser
F5
7.5
F6
5
Rain sensor
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
F7
20
Cigar lighter
F8
10
Fuel filler flap unlock supply
F9
15
Windscreen washers - rear
F10
15
Windscreen washers - front
F11
10
Luggage compartment release supply
F12
10
Fuel filler flap lock supply
F13
20
Fuel pump
F13
7.5
Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F14
5
Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor
F15
5
Ignition switch
F16
5
Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II
(board computer diagnostics)
F17
5
Steering wheel vibration actuator
F18
10
SRS (airbag) supply
F19
7.5
ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake
(EPB), accelerator pedal supply
F20
7.5
Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimming mirror,
lane departure warning
F21
15
Radio supply
201
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
F22
5
F23
20
F24
5
Circuits protected
Brake lamp switch
Sunroof
Climate Control Module and Steering Column Unit
supply
Rear fuse box
4-door and 5-door
E87483
202
Fuses
Estate
E75526
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
FA1
25
Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down,
central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)
FA2
25
Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down,
central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)
FA3
25
Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)
203
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
FA4
25
Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)
FA5
10
Rear locking (without rear door modules)
FA6
15
Auxiliary power socket
Relay coils
FA7
5
FA8
20
FA9
5
Relay coils VQM (Start Stop)
FA10
-
Not used
Keyless vehicle module
FA11
20
Accessories, trailer module
FA12
30
Electric driver's seat
FB1
-
Not used
FB2
15
Suspension module
FB3
15
Heated driver's seat
FB4
15
Heated front passenger seat
FB5
15
Left-hand rear heated seat
FB6
-
Not used
FB7
15
Right-hand rear heated seat
FB8
5
Parking aid, BLIS
FB9
30
Electric front passenger seat
FB10
10
Anti-theft alarm horn
FB11
–
Not used
FB12
–
Not used
FC1
-
Not used
FC2
-
Not used
FC3
-
Not used
FC4
-
Not used
FC5
20
FC6
-
Keyless vehicle
Not used
204
Fuses
Fuse
Ampere rating
Circuits protected
FC7
5
FC8
7.5
Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer
FC9
20
Audio amplifier
FC10
10
Sony audio system
FC11
–
Not used
FC12
–
Not used
Seat memory function module
205
Vehicle recovery
Rear towing eye
TOWING POINTS
Towing eye location
The screw-in towing eye is located in the
spare wheel well.
The towing eye must always be carried in
the vehicle.
Installing the towing eye
CAUTION
The screw-in towing eye has a
left-hand thread. Turn it
anti-clockwise to install it. Make sure
that the towing eye is fully tightened.
E87282
Insert your finger into the hole on the
underside of the cover and prise off the
cover. Install the towing eye.
Front towing eye
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
All vehicles
WARNINGS
Switch the ignition on when your
vehicle is being towed. The steering
lock will engage and the direction
indicators and brake lamps will not work
if you do not.
E87280
The brake and steering assistance
will not operate unless the engine is
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distances
and heavier steering.
CAUTIONS
Too much tension in the tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on the front
towing eye.
206
Vehicle recovery
CAUTIONS
Select neutral when your vehicle is
being towed.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without
jerking the vehicle that is towing.
Vehicles with automatic
transmission
CAUTIONS
If a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and a
distance of 20 kilometres (12 miles)
is to be exceeded the drive wheels
must be lifted clear of the ground.
It is recommended not to tow with the
drive wheels on the ground. However,
if it is required to move the vehicle
from a dangerous location, do not tow your
vehicle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) or
further than 20 kilometres (12 miles).
Do not tow your vehicle backwards.
In the event of a mechanical failure of
the transmission the drive wheels
must be lifted clear of the ground.
Do not tow your vehicle if the ambient
temperature is below 0ºC (32ºF).
207
Maintenance
Check when refuelling
GENERAL INFORMATION
•
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of Ford
Authorised Repairers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialised tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
•
•
•
•
In addition to regular servicing, we
recommend that you carry out the
following additional checks.
Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 220).
Brake fluid level. See Brake and
Clutch Fluid Check (page 221).
Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 222).
Tyre pressures (when cold). See
Technical Specifications (page 240).
Tyre condition. See Tyre Care (page
238).
Monthly checks
•
WARNINGS
Switch the ignition off before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not touch the electronic ignition
system parts after you have switched
the ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at high
voltage.
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan. Under
certain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes after
you have switched the engine off.
Engine coolant level (engine cold). See
Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
Power steering fluid level. See Power
Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
Air conditioning operation.
Parking brake operation.
Horn operation.
Tightness of wheel nuts. See
Technical Specifications (page 240).
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
BONNET
Opening the bonnet
CAUTION
When carrying out maintenance
checks, make sure that filler caps are
fitted securely.
Daily checks
•
•
•
Exterior lamps.
Interior lamps.
Warning lamps and indicators.
E73698
208
Maintenance
E87785
Raise the bonnet slightly and move the
catch towards the left-hand side of the
vehicle.
E87786
Open the bonnet and support it with the
strut.
Closing the bonnet
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is closed
properly.
Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop from
under its own weight for the last 20 – 30
centimetres (8 - 11 inches).
209
Maintenance
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)
B
A
J
I
H
D
C
G
E
F
E87714
1
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).
1
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
210
Maintenance
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)
B
A
J
I
D
C
H
G
E
F
E132430
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).
1
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
1
211
Maintenance
1
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)
B
A
J
I
D
C
H
G
E
F
E73231
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).
1
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
1
212
Maintenance
1
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)
A
E124921
J
I
B
C
H
D
G
E
F
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).
1
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
1
213
Maintenance
1
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4)
B
A
J
I
H
D
C
G
E
F
E81313
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
1
1
214
Maintenance
1
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL
A
E135199
J
I
B
C
H
D
G
E
F
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
1
215
Maintenance
1
1
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL
B
A
J
I
H
E73234
216
D
C
G
E
F
Maintenance
A
J
B
I
C
H
D
G
E
F
E124913
1
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).
1
F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
I
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
217
Maintenance
UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL
B
A
J
I
H
D
C
G
E
F
E87715
1
A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
B
Engine oil filler cap : See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check (page 221).
D
Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 227).
E
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 194).
1
F
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.
G
Screen washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).
H
Engine oil dipstick : See Engine Oil Check (page 220).
I
Power steering fluid reservoir: See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).
J
Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).
1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
218
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
DURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3L
DURATEC-HE (MI4)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L
DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)
A
B
A
B
E95540
A
MIN
B
MAX
E92036
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L
ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)
A
A
MIN
B
MAX
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)
B
A
B
E124917
E134114
A
A
MIN
B
MAX
B
E134040
219
A
MIN
B
MAX
Maintenance
Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The level
may therefore extend a few millimetres
beyond the MAX mark.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L
DURATORQ-TDCI (DV)
DIESEL/2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI
(DW) DIESEL/2.2L
DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL
A
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, top up
immediately.
B
Topping up
WARNINGS
Only top up when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.
E95543
A
MIN
B
MAX
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Remove the filler cap.
WARNING
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Do not top up further than the MAX
mark.
CAUTION
Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain
conditions, they could damage the
engine.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
specification. See Technical
Specifications (page 222).
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
5000 kilometres (3000 miles).
Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel
a strong resistance.
Checking the oil level
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
CAUTION
Checking the coolant level
Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
220
Maintenance
Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolant
and water using fluid that meets the Ford
specification. See Technical
Specifications (page 222).
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may therefore extend beyond the MAX
mark.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
CHECK
If the level is at the MIN mark, top up
immediately.
WARNINGS
Use of any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid may
reduce brake efficiency and not meet
Ford's performance standards.
Topping up
WARNINGS
Only top up when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
If the level is at the MIN mark, have
the system checked by a properly
trained technician as soon as
possible.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is hot. Wait for the engine
to cool down.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
CAUTIONS
In an emergency, you can add just
water to the cooling system to reach
a vehicle service station. Have the
system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are
supplied from the same reservoir.
Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
specification. See Technical
Specifications (page 222).
Prolonged use of incorrect dilution of
the coolant can cause engine damage
from corrosion, overheating or
freezing.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
WARNING
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape slowly as you unscrew the cap.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
CAUTION
Do not top up further than the MAX
mark.
221
Maintenance
Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
specification. See Technical
Specifications (page 222).
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
If the level is at the MIN mark, top up
immediately.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Topping up
When topping up, use a mixture of washer
fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
capability. We recommend that you use
only high quality washer fluid.
Remove the filler cap.
CAUTION
Do not top up further than the MAX
mark.
For information on fluid dilution, refer to
the product instructions.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle fluids
Note: Use fluids which meet the specifications or requirements defined. Use of other fluids
may lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty.
Specification
Viscosity
Grade
Recommended fluid
Engine oil - petrol
engines only
WSS-M2C948-B
5W-20
Castrol or Ford Engine Oil
Alternative engine oil
- all petrol engines
WSS-M2C913-C
5W-30
Castrol or Ford Engine Oil
Engine oil - diesel
engines
WSS-M2C913-C
5W-30
Castrol or Ford Engine Oil
Antifreeze
WSS-M97B44-D
-
Motorcraft SuperPlus Antifreeze
Item
222
Maintenance
Specification
Viscosity
Grade
WSS-M6C65-A2 or
ISO 4925 Class 6
-
Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4
LV High Performance
Brake Fluid
WSS-M2C204-A2
-
Ford Power Steering Fluid
Item
Brake fluid
Power steering fluid
Recommended fluid
Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which gives
a fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.
Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined
by WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C948-B (petrol engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30
that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.
Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking
periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission
levels.
Castrol engine oil recommended.
E115472
Capacities
Variant
Item
Capacity in Litres (gallons)
All
Power steering system
MAX mark
All
Windscreen and rear
window washer system
3.8 (0.8)
All
Fuel tank
70 (15.4)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
4.1 (0.9)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
3.8 (0.8)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
Engine cooling system
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
4.1 (0.9)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
3.8 (0.8)
223
6 (1.3)
Maintenance
Variant
Item
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma) Engine cooling system
Capacity in Litres (gallons)
6.5 (1.4)
2.0L Duratec-HE
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
4.3 (1.0)
2.0L Duratec-HE
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
3.9 (0.9)
2.0L Duratec-HE
Engine cooling system
6.2 (1.4)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
5.4 (1.2)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
5.1 (1.1)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
Engine cooling system
2.3L Duratec-HE
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
4.3 (1.0)
2.3L Duratec-HE
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
3.9 (0.9)
2.3L Duratec-HE
Engine cooling system
6.9 (1.5)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
3.8 (0.8)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
3.5 (0.8)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine cooling system
7.3 (1.6)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
5.5 (1.2)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
5 (1.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine cooling system
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system including the oil filter
6 (1.3)
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine lubrication system excluding the oil filter
5.4 (1.2)
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Engine cooling system
8.4 (1.9)
224
approx. 6.9 (1.5)
8.1 (1.8)
Vehicle Care
Cleaning the chrome trim
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not use abrasives or chemical
solvents. Use soapy water.
If you use a car wash with a waxing
cycle, make sure that you remove the
wax from the windscreen.
Cleaning the alloy wheels
CAUTIONS
Prior to using a car wash facility check
the suitability of it for your vehicle.
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the
clear coat finish over a period time.
Some car wash installations use
water at high pressure. This could
damage certain parts of your vehicle.
Remove the aerial before using an
automatic car wash.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
Switch the heater blower off to
prevent contamination of the fresh air
filter.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and
linings.
We recommend that you wash your vehicle
with a sponge and lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo.
Cleaning the headlamps
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
CAUTIONS
Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
•
Cleaning the rear window
•
CAUTION
Do not scrape the inside of the rear
window or use abrasives or chemical
solvents to clean it.
•
Clean them weekly with the
recommended wheel and tyre cleaner.
Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
Rinse them thoroughly with a
pressurised stream of water when you
have completed the cleaning process.
We recommend that you use Ford service
wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read
and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp
chamois leather to clean the inside of the
rear window.
225
Vehicle Care
Rear windows
Using other non-recommended cleaning
products can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
CAUTIONS
Do not use any abrasive materials to
clean the interior of the rear windows.
Body paintwork preservation
Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
CAUTIONS
Do not polish your vehicle in strong
sunshine.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Do not allow polish to touch plastic
surfaces. It could be difficult to
remove.
CAUTION
Do not apply polish to the windscreen
or rear window. This could cause the
wipers to become noisy and they may
not clear the window properly.
Remove apparently harmless looking
substances from the paintwork
immediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree
resins, insect remains, tar spots, road salt
and industrial fall out).
We recommend that you wax the
paintwork once or twice a year.
You should repair paintwork damage
caused by stones from the road or minor
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of
products is available from your Ford
Dealer. Read and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Seat belts
WARNINGS
Do not use abrasives, or chemical
solvents to clean them.
Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the seat belt retractor mechanism.
Clean the seat belts with interior cleaner
or water applied with a soft sponge. Let
the seat belts dry naturally, away from
artificial heat.
Instrument cluster screens, LCD
screens, radio screens
WARNING
Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents or chemical solvents to
clean them.
226
Vehicle battery
To connect the booster cables
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as
grounding points.
A
CAUTIONS
Connect batteries with only the same
nominal voltage.
Always use booster cables with
insulated clamps and adequate size
cable.
C
D
Do not disconnect the battery from
the vehicle’s electrical system.
B
E102925
1.
A
Flat battery vehicle
B
Booster battery vehicle
C
Positive connection cable
D
Negative connection cable
Position the vehicles so that they do
not touch one another.
2. Switch off the engine and any electrical
equipment.
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of
vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal
of vehicle A (cable C).
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of
vehicle B to the ground connection of
vehicle A (cable D). See Battery
connection points (page 228).
227
Vehicle battery
BATTERY CONNECTION
POINTS
CAUTIONS
Do not connect to the negative (–)
terminal of the flat battery.
Make sure that the cables are clear of
any moving parts and fuel delivery
system parts.
To start the engine
1.
Run the engine of vehicle B at
moderately high speed.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.
3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of
three minutes before disconnecting the
cables.
CAUTION
E114494
Do not switch on the headlamps when
disconnecting the cables. The peak
voltage could blow the bulbs.
CAUTION
Do not connect to the negative (–)
terminal of the flat battery.
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE
BATTERY
CAUTION
For vehicles with Start-stop the
battery requirement is different. It
must be replaced by one of exactly
the same specification as the original.
Note: Where applicable, the audio system
must be reprogrammed with the keycode.
The battery is located in the engine
compartment. See Maintenance (page
208).
228
Wheels and Tyres
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Do not fit more than one spare wheel
on your vehicle at any one time.
CAUTIONS
Use only approved wheel and tyre
sizes. Using other sizes could damage
the vehicle and will make the National
Type Approval invalid.
Do not use snow chains on this type
of wheel.
Do not drive through an automatic
car wash.
If you change the diameter of the tyres
from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the
correct speed. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have the engine management
system reprogrammed.
Do not carry out any tyre repairs on
a temporary spare wheel.
CAUTION
The ground clearance of your vehicle
will be reduced. Take care when
parking next to a curb.
If you intend to change the size of the
wheels from that fitted at the factory,
check the suitability with your dealer.
Note: Check your tyre pressures regularly
to optimise fuel economy.
Note: Your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
A decal with tyre pressure data is located
in the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.
Vehicle jack
Check and set the tyre pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive the vehicle and when the
tyres are cold.
WARNINGS
The vehicle jack supplied with your
vehicle should only be used when
changing a wheel in emergency
situations.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
Before using the vehicle jack, check
that it is not damaged or deformed
and that the thread is lubricated and
free from foreign matter.
Locking wheel nuts
You can obtain a replacement locking
wheel nut key and replacement locking
wheel nuts from your dealer using the
reference number certificate.
Never place anything between the
jack and the ground, or the jack and
the vehicle.
Vehicles with a temporary spare
wheel
Note: Vehicles with a tyre repair kit are not
equipped with a vehicle jack or a wheel
brace.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
It is recommended to use a workshop type
hydraulic jack for changing between
summer and winter tyres.
Drive the shortest possible distances.
229
Wheels and Tyres
Note: Use a jack with a minimum lifting
capacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate with
a minimum diameter of 80 millimetres (3.1
inches).
Your vehicle jack and wheel brace are
located in the spare wheel well.
Jacking and lifting points
Vehicles without tyre repair kit
CAUTION
Use only the specified jacking points.
If you use other positions, you may
damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
A
B
C
E86843
A
Jack
B
Wheel brace
C
Space for locking wheel nut key
230
Wheels and Tyres
A
B
E92658
A
Emergency use only
B
Maintenance
A
E93184
Indentations in the sills A show the
location of the jacking points.
E92932
231
Wheels and Tyres
Extend the wheel brace.
Type two
CAUTION
The screw-in towing eye has a
left-hand thread. Turn it
anti-clockwise to install it. Make sure
that the towing eye is fully tightened.
The screw-in towing eye is located in the
spare wheel well.
E93020
Vehicles with side skirts
E122502
Insert the screw-in towing eye into the
wheel brace.
E95345
Assembling the wheel brace
Removing the wheel trim
Type one
Type one
WARNING
Insert the flat end of the wheel brace
between the rim and the trim and carefully
remove the trim.
When returning the wheel brace
extension to its original position, take
care not to get your fingers caught.
Note: Make sure that the wheel brace is
fully extended.
E122546
232
Wheels and Tyres
Type two
WARNINGS
Secure the diagonally opposite
wheel with an appropriate block or
wheel chock.
Make sure that the arrows on
directional tyres point in the direction
of rotation when the vehicle is
moving forwards. If you have to fit a spare
wheel with the arrows pointing in the
opposite direction, have the tyre refitted
in the correct direction by a properly
trained technician.
1
2
Do not work underneath the vehicle
when it is supported only by a jack.
Make sure that the jack is vertical to
the jacking point and the base is flat
on the ground.
E122314
CAUTION
1. Insert the wheel trim remover.
2. Remove the wheel trim.
Note: Make sure that you pull the wheel
trim remover at right angles to the trim.
Do not lay alloy wheels face down on
the ground, this will damage the paint.
Note: The spare wheel is located under the
floor cover in the luggage compartment.
Removing a road wheel
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle in such a position
that neither the traffic nor you are
hindered or endangered.
Set up a warning triangle.
Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,
level ground with the wheels pointing
straight ahead.
Switch off the ignition and apply the
parking brake.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, select first or reverse
gear. If it has an automatic
transmission, select park.
E71948
Have the passengers leave the
vehicle.
1.
233
Install the locking wheel nut key.
Wheels and Tyres
2. Slacken the wheel nuts.
3. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is clear
of the ground.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.
1
Installing a road wheel
4
3
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tyre
sizes. Using other sizes could
damage the vehicle and will make
the National Type Approval invalid. See
Technical Specifications (page 240).
5
Do not fit run flat tyres on vehicles
that were not originally fitted with
them. Please contact your dealer for
more details regarding compatibility.
2
E75442
4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in the
sequence shown.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the
sequence shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 240).
7. Install the hub cap or cover using the
ball of your hand.
CAUTION
Do not install alloy wheels using
wheel nuts designed for use with steel
wheels.
Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels and
spoked steel wheels can also be used for
the steel spare wheel for a short time
(maximum two weeks).
WARNING
Have the wheel nuts checked for
tightness and the tyre pressure
checked as soon as possible.
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact
surfaces are free from foreign matter.
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT
Note: Make sure that the cones on the
wheel nuts are against the wheel.
Your vehicle may not have a spare tyre. In
this case it will have an emergency tyre
repair kit that can be used to repair one
flat tyre.
1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. Install the locking wheel nut key.
The tyre repair kit is located in the spare
wheel well.
234
Wheels and Tyres
General information
Using the tyre repair kit
WARNINGS
Depending on the type and extent of
tyre damage, some tyres can only be
partially sealed or not sealed at all.
Loss of tyre pressure can affect vehicle
handling, leading to loss of vehicle control.
WARNINGS
Compressed air can act as an
explosive or propellant.
Never leave the tyre repair kit
unattended while in use.
Do not use the tyre repair kit if the
tyre has already been damaged as a
result of being driven under inflated.
CAUTION
Do not keep the compressor operating
for more than 10 minutes.
Do not use the tyre repair kit on run
flat tyres.
Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for the
vehicle with which it was supplied.
Do not try to seal damage other than
that located within the visible tread
of the tyre.
•
Do not try to seal damage to the
tyre’s sidewall.
•
The tyre repair kit seals most tyre
punctures [with a diameter of up to six
millimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarily
restore mobility.
•
Observe the following rules when using the
kit:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drive with caution and avoid
making sudden steering or driving
manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or you are towing a
trailer.
The kit will provide you with an
emergency temporary repair, enabling
you to continue your journey to the next
vehicle or tyre dealer, or to drive a
maximum distance of 200 kilometres
(125 miles).
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
80 km/h (50 mph).
Keep the kit out of the reach of
children.
Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between –30°C (-22°F)
and +70°C (+158°F).
•
•
235
Park your vehicle at the roadside so
that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic and so that you are able to use
the kit without being in danger.
Apply the parking brake, even if you
have parked on a level road, to make
sure that the vehicle will not move.
Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects like nails or screws penetrating
the tyre.
Leave the engine running while the kit
is in use, but not if the vehicle is in an
enclosed or poorly ventilated area (for
example, inside a building). In these
circumstances, switch the compressor
on with the engine turned off.
Replace the sealant bottle with a new
one before the expiry date (see top of
bottle) is reached.
Inform all other users of the vehicle
that the tyre has been temporarily
sealed with the tyre repair kit and make
them aware of the special driving
conditions to be observed.
Wheels and Tyres
Inflating the tyre
A
K
WARNINGS
Check the sidewall of the tyre prior
to inflation. If there are any cracks,
bumps or similar damage, do not
attempt to inflate the tyre.
B
J
Do not stand directly beside the tyre
while the compressor is pumping.
Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If any
cracks, bumps or similar damage
appear, turn off the compressor and
let the air out by means of the pressure
relief valve B. Do not continue driving with
this tyre.
The sealant contains natural rubber
latex. Avoid contact with skin and
clothing. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your doctor.
I
H
C
If the tyre inflation pressure does not
reach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within seven
minutes, the tyre may have suffered
excessive damage, making a temporary
repair impossible. In this case, do not
continue driving with this tyre.
D
CAUTION
E94973
Screwing the bottle onto the bottle
holder will pierce the seal of the
bottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from
the holder as the sealant will escape.
236
G
F
A
Protective cap
B
Pressure relief valve
C
Hose
D
Orange cap
E
Bottle holder
F
Pressure gauge
G
Power plug with cable
H
Compressor switch
I
Label
J
Bottle lid
K
Sealant bottle
E
Wheels and Tyres
1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.
2. Peel off the label I showing the
maximum permissible speed of
80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing and
attach it to the instrument panel in the
driver’s field of view. Make sure the
label does not obscure anything
important.
3. Take the hose C and the power plug
with cable G out of the kit.
4. Unscrew the orange cap D and the
bottle lid J.
5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwise
into the bottle holder E fully tight.
6. Remove the valve cap from the
damaged tyre.
7. Detach the protective cap A from the
hose C and screw the hose C firmly
onto the valve of the damaged tyre.
8. Make sure that the compressor switch
H is in position 0.
9. Insert the power plug G into the cigar
lighter socket or auxiliary power socket.
See Cigar Lighter (page 127). See
Auxiliary Power Points (page 128).
10. Start the engine.
11.
Move the compressor switch H to
position 1.
12. Inflate the tyre for no longer than
seven minutes to an inflation pressure
of minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and a
maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Move
the compressor switch H to position
0 and check the current tyre pressure
with pressure gauge F.
13. Remove the power plug G from the
cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power
socket.
14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from the
tyre valve and replace the protective
cap A. Fasten the valve cap again.
15. Leave the sealant bottle K in the
bottle holder E.
16.
Make sure the kit, the bottle lid and
the orange cap are stored safely, but
still easily accessible in the vehicle.
The kit will be required again when
you check the tyre pressure.
17. Immediately drive approximately
three kilometres (two miles) so that
the sealant can seal the damaged
area.
Note: When pumping in the sealant through
the tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to
6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about
30 seconds.
WARNING
If you experience heavy vibrations,
unsteady steering behaviour or
noises while driving, reduce your
speed and drive with caution to a place
where it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.
Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If the
tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) or
if there are any cracks, bumps or similar
damage visible, do not continue driving
with this tyre.
Checking the tyre pressure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
237
Stop the vehicle after driving
approximately three kilometres
(two miles). Check, and where
necessary, adjust the pressure of the
damaged tyre.
Attach the kit and read the tyre
pressure from the pressure gauge F.
If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyre
is 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it to
the specified pressure. See Technical
Specifications (page 240).
Follow the inflation procedure once
again to top up the tyre.
Check the tyre pressure again from the
pressure gauge F. If the tyre pressure
is too high, deflate the tyre to the
specified pressure using the pressure
relief valve B.
Wheels and Tyres
6. Once you have inflated the tyre to its
correct tyre pressure, move the
compressor switch H to position 0,
remove the power plug G from the
socket, unscrew the hose C, fasten the
valve cap and replace the protective
cap A.
7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottle
holder E and store the kit away safely
in its original location.
8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist to
get the damaged tyre replaced. Before
the tyre is removed from the rim, inform
your tyre dealer that the tyre contains
sealant. Renew the kit as soon as
possible after it has been used once.
Note: Remember that emergency roadside
tyre repair kits only provide temporary
mobility. Regulations concerning tyre repair
after usage of tyre repair kit may differ from
country to country. You should consult a
tyre specialist for advice.
TYRE CARE
E70415
To make sure the front and rear tyres of
your vehicle wear evenly and last longer,
we recommend that you swap the tyres
from front to rear and vice versa at regular
intervals of between 5000 and 10000
kilometres (3000 and 6000 miles).
CAUTION
Do not scrub the sidewalls of the tyres
when you are parking.
WARNING
If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowly
and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the kerb.
Before driving, make sure the tyre is
adjusted to the recommended
inflation pressure. See Technical
Specifications (page 240). Monitor the
tyre pressure until the sealed tyre is
replaced.
Examine the tyres regularly for cuts, foreign
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel
alignment is outside specification.
Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of
together with normal household waste.
Return remains of sealant to your dealer
or dispose of it in compliance with local
waste disposal regulations.
Check the tyre pressures (including the
spare) when cold, every two weeks.
USING WINTER TYRES
CAUTION
Make sure that you use the correct
wheel nuts for the type of wheel the
winter tyres are fitted to.
If winter tyres are used, make sure that the
tyre pressures are correct. See Technical
Specifications (page 240).
238
Wheels and Tyres
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
The system may take longer to
detect low pressure in the tyres if you
have fitted snow chains.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
Do not drive on significantly
under-inflated tyres. This may cause
the tyres to overheat and fail.
Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tyre
tread life and may also affect your ability
to drive the vehicle safely.
Do not use snow chains on snow-free
roads.
Only fit snow chains to specified
tyres. See Technical
Specifications (page 240).
Do not bend or damage the valves
when you are inflating the tyres.
CAUTION
Have tyres installed by properly
trained technicians.
If your vehicle is fitted with wheel
trims, remove them before fitting
snow chains.
Note: After changing the tyres or sensors
the system will take a few minutes to reset.
During this period the system is operational
but a warning lamp may appear.
Note: The ABS will continue to operate
normally.
Only use small link snow chains.
Note: If you fit tyres that do not have
monitoring sensors, a message will be
shown in the display. See Information
Messages (page 98). Confirm this message
to deactivate the system.
Only use snow chains on the front wheels.
Vehicles with stability control
(ESP)
The system monitors the pressure in the
tyres using sensors located on the wheels
and a receiver located in your vehicle.
When the system detects low pressure in
the tyres, a warning message is displayed
in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 98).
Vehicles with stability control (ESP) may
exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics which can be reduced by
switching traction control off. See Using
Stability Control (page 155).
TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
If a low pressure warning message is
displayed in the information display, check
the tyre pressures as soon as possible and
inflate them to the recommended
pressure. See Technical Specifications
(page 240). If this happens frequently, have
the cause determined and rectified as soon
as possible.
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to regularly check
the tyre pressures.
The system will only provide a low
tyre pressure warning. It will not
inflate the tyres.
239
Wheels and Tyres
Checking the tyre pressures
Setting the vehicle load
Note: If the tyre pressures are greater than
or equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), you will see
the + symbol below the pressure value. The
system only measures pressure up to 3.3
bar (48 lbf/in²). The + symbol indicates that
the tyre pressures may be higher.
Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a
slightly different menu structure. Select
Settings first to access Setup.
Correct tyre pressure settings depend on
vehicle load. See Technical
Specifications (page 240). The system
can only detect low pressure if you have
entered the current vehicle load.
Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a
slightly different menu structure. Select
Settings first to access Information.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Information with the up and
down buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Tyre Pressures with the up
and down buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the main menu.
Highlight Setup with the up and down
buttons and press the right arrow
button.
Highlight Tyre Pressures with the up
and down buttons and press the right
arrow button.
Highlight the desired setting and press
the OK button to confirm the setting.
Press the left arrow button to exit the
menu. Hold the left arrow button
pressed to return to the trip computer
display.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel nut torque
Wheel type
Nm (Ib-ft)
All
140 (103)
240
Wheels and Tyres
Tyre pressures (cold tyres)
Up to 80 km/h (50 mph)
Normal load
Variant
All
Spare wheel when
it differs from the
other fitted wheels
Full load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
T125/90 R 16
4.2 (61)
4.2 (61)
4.2 (61)
4.2 (61)
215/55 R 16
3 (44)
3 (44)
3 (44)
3 (44)
Tyre size
Up to 160 km/h (100mph)
Normal load
Variant
Tyre size
Full load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
2.2 (32)
2.2 (32)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
1.6L Duratec-16V TiVCT (Sigma)
205/55 R 16
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4), 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V, 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW)
215/55 R 16
235/45 R18
2.4 (35)
2.2 (32)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4), 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V, 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW)
215/50 R 17
2.4 (35)
2.4 (35)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
*
*
241
Wheels and Tyres
Normal load
Variant
*
Tyre size
Full load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4), 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V, 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW)
235/40 R 18
2.4 (35)
2.2 (32)
2.6 (38)
3.1 (45)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4), 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V, 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW)
235/40 R 19
2.4 (35)
2.2 (32)
2.6 (38)
3 (44)
2.0L Duratec-HE
(MI4) and 2.3L
Duratec-HE (MI4)
215/55 R 16
*
2.2 (32)
2.2 (32)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
2.0L Duratec-HE
(MI4) and 2.3L
Duratec-HE (MI4)
215/50 R 17,
235/40 R 18,
235/45 R 18 and
235/40 R 19
2.2 (32)
2.2 (32)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.
242
Wheels and Tyres
Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph)
Normal load
Full load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
bar (lbf/
in²)
2.2 (32)
2.2 (32)
2.5 (36)
2.9 (42)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
215/55 R 16,
Duratec-HE (MI4),
235/40 R 18,
2.3L Duratec-HE
235/45 R 18 and
(MI4) and 1.6L
235/40 R 19
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V
2.4 (35)
2.2 (32)
2.6 (38)
3.1 (45)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma), 2.0L
Duratec-HE (MI4),
2.3L Duratec-HE
(MI4) and 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel Stage V
2.4 (35)
2.4 (35)
2.6 (38)
3.1 (45)
215/55 R 16,
235/40 R 18,
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4)
235/45 R 18 and
235/40 R 19
2.5 (36)
2.3 (33)
2.9 (42)
3.2 (46)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4)
2.5 (36)
2.4 (35)
2.9 (42)
3.2 (46)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
215/55 R 16,
235/40 R 18,
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
235/45 R 18 and
235/40 R 19
(DW)
2.5 (36)
2.3 (33)
2.9 (42)
3.1 (45)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) and 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi
(DW)
2.5 (36)
2.4 (35)
2.9 (42)
3.1 (45)
Variant
1.6L Duratec-16V TiVCT (Sigma)
Tyre size
205/55 R 16
215/50 R 17
215/50 R 17
215/50 R 17
243
Vehicle identification
Note: The vehicle identification plate
design may vary to that shown.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
PLATE
B
C
Note: The information shown on the vehicle
identification plate is dependant upon
market requirements.
D
E
F
G
A
H
I
E135662
A
Model
B
Variant
C
Engine designation
D
Emission level
E
Vehicle identification number
F
Gross vehicle weight
G
Gross train weight
H
Maximum front axle weight
I
Maximum rear axle weight
The vehicle identification number and
maximum weights are shown on a plate
located on the lock side of the right-hand
door aperture at the bottom.
244
Vehicle identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
E87496
The vehicle identification number is
stamped into the floor panel on the
right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is
also shown on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
245
Capacities and Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle dimensions
4-door
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
Maximum length - without bumper styling kit
4850 (190.9)
Maximum length - with bumper styling kit
4866 (191.6)
Overall width including exterior mirrors
2092 (82.4)
Overall height - EC kerb weight
1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)
Wheelbase
2850 (112.2)
Front track
1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)
Rear track
1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)
5-door
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
Maximum length - without bumper styling kit
4784 (188.3)
Maximum length - with bumper styling kit
4800 (189)
Overall width including exterior mirrors
2092 (82.4)
Overall height - EC kerb weight
1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)
Wheelbase
2850 (112.2)
Front track
1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)
Rear track
1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)
Estate
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
Maximum length - without bumper styling kit
4837 (190.4)
Maximum length - with bumper styling kit
4858 (191.3)
Overall width including exterior mirrors
2092 (82.4)
246
Capacities and Specifications
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
Overall height - EC kerb weight without roof bars
1472 - 1512 (58 - 59.5)
Overall height - EC kerb weight including roof bars
1508 - 1548 (59.4 - 61)
Wheelbase
2850 (112.2)
Front track
1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)
Rear track
1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)
Towing equipment dimensions
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E87092
247
Capacities and Specifications
4-door
Item
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball
102 (4)
B
Attachment point – centre of tow ball
1 (0.04)
C
Wheel centre – centre of tow ball
D
Centre of tow ball – side member
438 (17.2)
E
Inner side of side member
876 (34.5)
F
Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachment
point
434 (17.1)
G
Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachment
point
707 (27.8)
1150 (45.3)
5-door
Item
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball
100 (3.9)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball (with sport
bumper)
98 (3.9)
B
Attachment point – centre of tow ball
C
Wheel centre – centre of tow ball
1080 (42.5)
D
Centre of tow ball – side member
438 (17.2)
E
Inner side of side member
876 (34.5)
F
Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachment
point
364 (14.3)
G
Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachment
point
637 (25.1)
248
1 (0.04)
Capacities and Specifications
Estate
Item
Dimension description
Dimension in mm (inches)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumper
styling kit)
100 (3.9)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumper
styling kit)
95 (3.7)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumper
styling kit, with self levelling suspension)
113 (4.4)
A
Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumper
styling kit, with self levelling suspension)
108 (4.3)
B
Attachment point – centre of tow ball
1 (0.04)
C
Wheel centre – centre of tow ball
D
Centre of tow ball – side member
438 (17.2)
E
Inner side of side member
876 (34.5)
F
Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachment
point
419 - 429 (16.5 - 16.9)
G
Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachment
point
692 - 702 (27.2 - 27.6)
249
1135 - 1140 (44.7 - 44.9)
Audio introduction
IMPORTANT AUDIO
INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Due to technical incompatibility,
recordable (CD-R) and rewritable
(CD-RW) discs may not function
correctly.
E66257
Disc labels
Audio CD
These units will play compact discs
that conform to the International
Red Book standard audio
specification. Copy protected CDs from
some manufacturers do not conform to
this standard and playback cannot be
guaranteed.
Dual format, dual sided discs (DVD
Plus, CD-DVD format), adopted by
the music industry, are thicker than
normal CDs and consequently playback
cannot be guaranteed, and jamming could
occur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with
a scratch protection film or self adhesive
labels attached should not be used.
Warranty claims, where this type of disc is
found to be inside an audio unit returned
for repair, will not be accepted.
E66254
MP3
All units except Sony CD (but not the
6CD) are designed to play
commercially pressed 12 cm audio
compact discs only. The Sony CD unit will
play 8 cm discs with a Sony approved
adaptor fitted (CSA-8).
E66255
The audio unit may be damaged if
unsuitable items like credit cards or
coins are pushed inside the CD
aperture.
Audio unit labels
E66256
250
Audio unit overview
6000CD
A
B
C
Q
D
P
E
O
F
N
G
H
M
L
K
J
I
E141803
A
CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 265).
B
On, off and volume control. See On/off control (page 256).
C
CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).
D
Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 255).
E
Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 259).
F
Folder up.
G
Folder down.
H
End call. See Telephone (page 272).
I
Information. See MP3 display options (page 269).
J
Seek up. See Station tuning control (page 260).
K
Seek down. See Station tuning control (page 260).
L
Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 258).
M
Accept call. See Telephone (page 272).
N
Menu. See Audio menu control (page 256).
251
Audio unit overview
O
Bass and treble control. See Bass/treble control (page 256). Balance and
fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 256).
P
Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 258).
Q
Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 270). See
Compact Disc Player (page 265).
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB
A B
C
E
D
F
G
S
R
H
Q
I
P
J
E138370
O
M
N
L
K
A
Scan. See Station tuning control (page 260). See Compact disc track
scanning (page 267).
B
Information. See MP3 display options (page 269).
C
Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 258).
D
CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 265).
E
Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 255).
F
DSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 262).
G
Autostore. See Autostore control (page 258).
H
Menu. See Audio menu control (page 256).
I
Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 259).
J
On and off control. See On/off control (page 256).
252
Audio unit overview
K
Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 256).
L
End call. See Telephone (page 272).
M
Volume control, navigation buttons and select button.
N
Accept call. See Telephone (page 272).
O
Tone. See Bass/treble control (page 256).
P
Phone menu. See Telephone (page 272).
Q
Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 258).
R
Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 270). See
Compact Disc Player (page 265).
S
CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).
253
Audio System Security
SECURITY CODE
The number of attempts will be shown in
the display.
Each unit incorporates a unique code that
must be entered before the unit will
operate.
If the display reverts to CODE another
entry attempt may be made immediately.
If the display shows WAIT 30, the unit will
be locked for 30 minutes. Wait until the
timer counts down to zero. When CODE is
shown in the display, enter the correct
code.
If the battery is disconnected or if the unit
has been removed from the vehicle, the
code must be re-entered before the unit
will operate.
Note: After 10 incorrect attempts the unit
will be permanently inoperative and
LOCKED will be shown in the display. See
your dealer.
LOST SECURITY CODE
If you lose the unique code, contact your
dealer and supply details of your audio unit
along with some proof of identity.
ENTERING A SECURITY CODE
If CODE - - - -, CODE 0000 or ENTER
KEYCODE appears in the display when
you switch on the audio unit, you must
enter the unique code using the station
preset buttons.
6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Using the station preset buttons enter
the unique code.
2. If you make a mistake entering the
code, re-enter the digits by continuing
to select buttons 0-9. The display will
advance from digit position 1 to 4 and
then back again.
3. Make sure that the complete code is
correct before pressing either the *
preset button or the button between
the navigation buttons to confirm your
selection.
INCORRECT SECURITY CODE
Up to a maximum of 10 unique code entry
attempts are allowed with various
consequences if you get it wrong.
254
Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays
SETTING THE CLOCK AND
DATE ON THE AUDIO UNIT
Sony and Sony DAB
6000CD
1. Press the CLOCK button.
2. Press the left or right navigation button
until the date or time value that you
wish to change flashes in the display.
3. Using the up or down navigation button
change the selected date or time value.
4. Using the left and right navigation
buttons select additional date or time
values that you wish to change. The
selected value will flash in the display.
5. Repeat steps three and four as
necessary.
6. Press the CLOCK button or the button
between the navigation buttons to exit
and save your settings.
Changing the date and time
Changing the date and time
Press the CLOCK button to display the
date and time.
Note: If you do not press another button
within 30 seconds of pressing the CLOCK
button, the display will return to its previous
setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Using the seek up or seek down button
select the date or time value that you
wish to change. The selected value will
flash in the display.
Rotate the volume control to change
the selected date or time value.
Using the seek up or seek down button
select additional date or time values
that you wish to change.
Rotate the volume control to change
the selected date or time value.
Press the CLOCK button to exit and
save your settings.
12/24 hour format
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the up or down navigation button
until the 12/24 icon is shown in the
display.
3. Using the left or right navigation button
select the required setting.
4. Press the MENU button or the button
between the navigation buttons to
confirm your selection.
Note: If you do not press the CLOCK button
within 30 seconds of changing a date or
time value, the display will exit and save the
new values automatically.
Note: Press and hold the CLOCK button
for more than two seconds to automatically
select the hour value for winter or summer
time adjustment.
12/24 hour format
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until the 12/24 icon is shown in the
display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button
select your required setting.
3. Press the MENU button repeatedly or
allow the system to time out to confirm
your selection.
255
Audio unit operation
ON/OFF CONTROL
BALANCE/FADE CONTROL
Press the on/off control. This will also
operate the unit for up to one hour with the
ignition turned off.
The balance function is used to adjust the
sound distribution between the left and
right speakers.
The radio will switch off automatically
after one hour.
The fade function is used to adjust the
sound distribution from front to rear in
vehicles fitted with rear speakers.
BASS/TREBLE CONTROL
6000CD
The bass function is used to adjust the
low-frequency response of the audio unit.
Press the SOUND button four times for
balance or five times for fade.
The middle function is used to adjust the
mid-frequency response of the audio unit.
Use the volume control or on some units
the seek up or seek down button to make
the necessary adjustment.
The treble function is used to adjust the
high-frequency response of the audio unit.
Sony and Sony DAB
6000CD
Press the FAD/BAL button once for fade
or twice for balance.
Note: The selected level will be shown in
the display.
Use the up and down navigation buttons
for fade adjustment, and the left and right
navigation buttons for balance adjustment.
1.
Press the SOUND button once for
bass, twice for middle or three times
for treble.
2. Use the volume control or on some
units the seek up or seek down button
to make the necessary adjustment.
The selected level will be shown in the
display.
AUDIO MENU CONTROL
Sony and Sony DAB
Use the MENU button to access functions
that cannot be selected directly via one of
the control buttons. Press the MENU
button for first level functions, or press and
hold the MENU button for other second
level functions (not available on Sony or
Sony DAB audio units).
Note: You can adjust these settings
separately for CD, Radio and Aux.
Note: The selected level will be shown in
the display.
1.
Press the TONE button once for bass,
twice for middle or three times for
treble.
2. Use the up and down navigation
buttons to make the necessary
adjustment.
256
Audio unit operation
6000CD
Menu functions
First level
Second level
During radio reception
During tape playback
During CD playback
During all functions
Manual tuning
12/24 hour
Scan
Traffic local or
distant
Scan tuning
AVC
Shuffle
AF
12/24 hour
ADV menu
Repeat
REG
AVC
-
Comp
News
ADV menu
-
12/24 hour
CLIP
-
-
AVC
-
-
ADV menu
*
*
**
VID
*
Bluetooth enable/
disable
Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and
vehicles.
Note: Second level functions (advanced) can also be entered by selecting ADV menu from
the first level menu.
*
Automatic volume control.
**
Alternative frequencies.
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB
Menu functions
During radio reception
During CD playback
12/24 hour
12/24 hour
CLIP ON/OFF
CLIP ON/OFF
News ON/OFF
News ON/OFF
1
AVC
AVC
2
2
AF
AF
257
1
Audio unit operation
Menu functions
During radio reception
During CD playback
3
3
TA volume
TA volume
Traffic local or distant
Traffic local or distant
Regional ON/OFF
Shuffle
-
Repeat
-
Comp ON/OFF
Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and
vehicles.
1
Automatic volume control.
2
Alternative frequencies.
3
Traffic announcement.
This can be repeated on each waveband
and for each preset button.
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with
Bluetooth
Note: When you drive to another part of the
country, FM RDS (Radio Data System)
stations that broadcast on alternative
frequencies are stored on the preset
buttons.
Pressing PHONE followed by the MENU
button will access the following options:
• No active phone or Active phone
• Debond BT device
• Reject calls ON/OFF
• Bluetooth ON/OFF.
WAVEBAND BUTTON
Note: The selector can also be used to
return to radio reception when you have
been listening to another source.
STATION PRESET BUTTONS
This feature allows you to store your
favourite stations so that they can be
recalled by selecting the appropriate
waveband and pressing one of the preset
buttons.
Press the RADIO button to select from the
wavebands available.
1. Select a waveband.
2. Tune to the station required.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons. The audio unit will mute.
When sound returns the station has
been stored.
Note: This function will overwrite the
previously stored autostore preset stations.
AUTOSTORE CONTROL
Note: This function can also be used to
store stations manually in the same way as
other wavebands.
Note: The strongest signals available on
the selected waveband will be stored.
258
Audio unit operation
The sound is muted and AUTOSTORE will
be shown in the display while the unit
searches through the frequencies.
If the traffic signal weakens, TP will flash
in the display. Press the seek up or seek
down button (the left or right navigation
button on Sony or Sony DAB audio units)
to find another station.
When the search is complete, sound is
restored and the strongest signals are
stored on the autostore presets.
Note: If this happens during CD or AUX
playback or, on certain models, with the
radio volume set to zero, the unit will retune
automatically if the station is not available.
6000CD
Press and hold the RADIO button.
Press and hold the AST or RADIO button.
If a non-traffic station is selected or
recalled using a preset button, the audio
unit will remain on that station unless TA
is turned off, then on again.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONTROL
Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or
manual tune to a non TA station no traffic
announcement will be heard.
Sony CD
Local or distant traffic
Many stations that broadcast on the FM
waveband have a TP code to signify that
they carry traffic programme information.
The number of RDS or EON traffic
announcements may become excessive
in some areas so there is an option to
select between local traffic information
and all available information.
Activating traffic announcements
Before you can receive traffic
announcements, you must press the TA
button. Either TA-D or TA-L will be shown
in the display to indicate that the feature
is switched on.
6000CD
1.
Press and hold the MENU button until
the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly
until TA is shown in the display.
3. Press the seek up or seek down button
to select either local (TA LOCAL) or
distant (TA DIST) traffic
announcements.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the
menu to time out to confirm your
selection.
If you are already tuned to a station that
broadcasts traffic information, TP will also
be shown in the display. Otherwise the unit
will search for a traffic programme and
display TP SEEK while doing so. If it cannot
locate such a station, NOT FOUND will be
shown in the display.
TP will be shown within a box in the display
when you are tuned to a station providing
traffic information from a linked RDS (radio
data system) or EON (enhanced other
network) station.
Note: Either TA-L or TA-D will be shown in
the display.
When traffic information is broadcast, it
will automatically interrupt normal radio,
tape or CD playback and TRAFFIC or
NEWS will be shown in the display.
259
Audio unit operation
Sony CD
STATION TUNING CONTROL
1.
Press the MENU button and use the
up or down navigation button to select
the TA display.
2. Press the left or right navigation button
to select your required setting.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm
your selection.
DAB service linking
Note: The DAB service linking is as per
default off.
Note: Service linking allows
cross-referencing to other corresponding
frequencies of the same station, for example
FM and other DAB ensembles.
Traffic announcement volume
Note: The system will automatically
change to another corresponding station if
the current one becomes unavailable, for
example when leaving the coverage area.
Traffic announcements interrupt normal
broadcasts at a preset minimum level that
is usually louder than normal listening
volumes.
Switching DAB service linking on and
off
To adjust the preset volume
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
scroll through the display until DIGITAL
RADIO SERVICE LINK is shown in the
display.
3. Using the left or right navigation button
select AUTO or OFF.
4. Press the MENU button or the button
between the navigation buttons to
confirm your selection.
6000CD
1. Press and hold the TA button.
2. Rotate the volume control to make the
necessary adjustment.
Note: The selected level will be shown in
the display.
Sony CD
1. Press and hold the TA button.
2. Press the left or right navigation button
to make the necessary adjustment.
Seek tuning
6000CD
Note: The selected level will be shown in
the display.
Select a waveband and briefly press the
seek up or seek down button. The unit will
stop at the first station it finds in the
direction you have chosen.
Ending traffic announcements
The audio unit will return to normal
operation at the end of each traffic
announcement. To end the announcement
prematurely, press TA during the
announcement.
Sony CD
Select a waveband and briefly press the
up or down navigation button. The unit will
stop at the first station it finds in the
direction you have chosen.
Note: If you press TA at any other time it
will switch all announcements off.
260
Audio unit operation
Manual tuning
Sony and Sony DAB
6000CD
1.
Press the SCAN button. SCAN flashes
or SCANNING is shown in the display.
2. Press the left or right navigation button
to scan within a waveband.
3. Press SCAN again to continue listening
to a station.
1.
Select a waveband and press the
MENU button until MAN is shown in
the display.
2. Press the seek up or seek down button
to tune up or down the waveband in
small increments or press and hold to
increment quickly, until you find a
station you want to listen to.
Sony CD
Select a waveband and briefly press the
up or down navigation button to tune up
or down the waveband in small
increments. The display shows the
frequency selected.
Sony DAB
Note: Ensembles are groups of stations.
Briefly press the up or down navigation
button to move up or down the ensembles.
Scan tuning
The SCAN function allows you to listen to
10 seconds of each station detected.
6000CD
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until SCAN is shown in the display.
2. Press the seek up or seek down button
to scan up or down the selected
waveband.
3. Depending on the audio unit, press the
seek up or seek down button or the
MENU button to continue listening to
a station.
261
Audio unit menus
Changing the DSP settings
AUTOMATIC VOLUME
CONTROL
1.
Press the DSP button once for
occupancy and twice for equaliser. For
item location: See Audio unit
overview (page 251).
2. Use the up and down navigation
buttons to select the required setting.
3. Press the button between the
navigation buttons to confirm your
selection.
When available, automatic volume control
(AVC) adjusts the volume level to
compensate for engine noise and road
speed noise.
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until AVC is shown in the display.
2. Use the seek up or seek down button
to adjust the AVC setting.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
AUDIO DISTORTION
REDUCTION (CLIP)
When available CLIP automatically detects
sound distortion and reduces the volume
level until the distortion has been
eliminated. This means that whilst the
display might change numerically when
you raise the volume manually with the
control, there may be no actual increase
in sound.
Sony and Sony DAB
1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
select AVC.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Press and hold the MENU button until
the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly
until CLIP is shown in the display.
3. Using the seek up or seek down button
turn the function on or off.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
(DSP)
DSP occupancy
This feature takes into account the
differences in distance from the various
speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Select
the sitting position for which the audio is
to be correctly enhanced.
Sony and Sony DAB
1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
select CLIP.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
DSP equaliser
Select the music category that most suits
your listening preference. The audio output
will change to enhance the particular style
of music chosen.
262
Audio unit menus
3. Using the seek up or seek down button
select the required setting.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES
Many programmes broadcast on the FM
waveband have a programme
identification (PI) code, which can be
recognised by audio units.
Sony and Sony DAB
If your radio has alternative frequencies
(AF) tuning switched on and you move
from one transmission area to another, this
function will search for and switch to a
stronger station signal, if one can be found.
1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the left or right navigation button
select the required setting.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm
your selection.
Under certain conditions, however, AF
tuning may temporarily disrupt normal
reception.
REGIONAL MODE (REG)
When selected, the unit continually
evaluates signal strength and, if a better
signal becomes available, the unit will
switch to that alternative. It mutes while
it checks a list of alternative frequencies
and, if necessary, it will search once across
the selected waveband for a genuine
alternative frequency.
Regional mode (REG) controls the
behaviour of AF switching between
regionally related networks of a parent
broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly
large network across a large part of the
country. At various times of the day this
large network may be broken down into a
number of smaller regional networks,
typically centred on major towns or cities.
When the network is not split into regional
variants, the whole network caries the
same programming.
It will restore radio reception when it finds
one or, if one is not found, the unit will
return to the original stored frequency. On
certain units, NOT FOUND will be shown
in the display.
With AF-MAN selected, the unit operates
in a similar way to AF-AUTO or AF-ON, but
only searches for an alternative frequency
when prompted by pressing a preset
button.
Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'
AF switches when neighbouring regional
networks are not carrying the same
programming.
With AF-OFF selected, the original stored
frequency remains selected. In this mode,
AF-OFF will be displayed every time the
unit is turned on.
Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger
coverage area if neighbouring regional
networks are carrying the same
programming, but can cause 'random' AF
switches if they are not.
All except Sony and Sony DAB
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
1.
Press and hold the MENU button until
the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly
until AF is shown in the display.
Press and hold the MENU button until
the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly
until REG is shown in the display.
263
Audio unit menus
3. Using the seek up or seek down button
turn the function on or off.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
3. Press the button between the
navigation buttons to make your
selection.
4. Using the left or right navigation button
turn the function on or off.
5. Press the MENU button or the button
between the navigation buttons to
confirm your selection.
Sony and Sony DAB
1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
select REGIONAL.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the
system to time out to confirm your
selection.
NEWS BROADCASTS
Some audio units interrupt normal
reception to broadcast news bulletins from
stations on the FM waveband or radio data
system (RDS) and enhanced other
network (EON) linked stations, in the same
way as traffic information is provided.
During news broadcasts, the display
alternates between the station name and
NEWS. News interrupts are broadcast at
the same preset volume level as traffic
announcements.
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Press and hold the MENU button until
NEWS is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button
turn the function on or off.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm
your selection.
Sony and Sony DAB
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
scroll through the display until NEWS
is shown in the display.
264
Compact Disc Player
LOADING COMPACT DISCS
LOADING THE COMPACT DISC
CHANGER
6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB
CAUTIONS
Do not insert more than one disc into
each slot.
Always check that the CD aperture is
empty before inserting a CD.
Insert a CD, label side up, into the audio
unit.
Keep the door closed when the
magazine is installed.
LOADING, READING CD and AUDIO CD
or MP3 CD will be shown in the display,
and playback will start automatically.
Note: The unit will only accept conventional
CD's.
TRACK SELECTION
For item location: See CD changer (page
131).
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Press the SEEK UP button once to
move to the next track or press it
repeatedly to access later tracks.
2. Press the SEEK DOWN button once
to replay the current track. If pressed
within two seconds of the start of a
track, the previous track will be
selected.
3. Press the SEEK DOWN button
repeatedly to select previous tracks.
Sony and Sony DAB
E66144
1.
Press the up navigation button once to
move to the next track or press it
repeatedly to access later tracks.
2. Press the down navigation button once
to replay the current track. If pressed
within two seconds of the start of a
track, the previous track will be
selected.
3. Press the down navigation button
repeatedly to select previous tracks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the door.
Press the button.
Remove the magazine.
Insert a disc, with the label facing
upwards, into each slot. You will hear
a distinct click to confirm correct
loading.
5. Install the magazine in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the
magazine. You will hear a distinct click
to confirm correct loading.
6. Close the door.
265
Compact Disc Player
UNLOADING THE COMPACT
DISC CHANGER
FAST FORWARD/REVERSE
All except Sony and Sony DAB
CAUTION
Press and hold the seek up or the seek
down button to search forwards or
backwards within the tracks on the disc.
Keep the door closed when the
magazine is installed.
Sony and Sony DAB
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the door.
Press the button.
Remove the magazine.
Pull the tray out using the lever on the
side.
5. Remove the CD and close the tray.
6. Repeat steps four and five to remove
remaining CD's.
7. Install the magazine in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the
magazine. You will hear a distinct click
to confirm correct loading.
8. Close the door.
Press and hold the left or right navigation
button to search forwards or backwards
within the tracks on the disc.
SHUFFLE/RANDOM
Random track playback, also known as
shuffle, plays all tracks on a CD in random
order.
6000CD
Note: When SHUFF CD is selected only the
tracks on the current CD will be shuffled.
When SHUF ALL is selected the tracks on
all the CD's will be shuffled.
COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until SHUF is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button
scroll through the display until SHUF
ALL or SHUFF CD is shown in the
display.
3. Using the seek up or seek down button
select the next track to shuffle if
required.
Note: During playback, the display indicates
the disc, track and time that has elapsed
since the start of the track.
Note: On CD changer audio units, if two or
more CD's are loaded one after the other,
playback will start with the last CD loaded.
During radio reception, press the CD/AUX
button once to start CD playback.
Note: With the function on, SHUFFLE will
be shown in the display as each new track
is selected.
Playback will start immediately after a disc
is loaded.
Compact disc changer playback
Press the CD/AUX button twice to start
CD playback.
Note: If the CD/AUX button is pressed
when no discs are loaded, NO CDS will be
shown in the display.
266
Compact Disc Player
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB
COMPACT DISC TRACK
SCANNING
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
scroll through the display until
SHUFFLE is shown in the display.
3. Use the left or right navigation button
to switch the function on and off.
The SCAN function allows you to preview
each track for approximately 10 seconds.
6000CD
Note: When selected, SCAN will be shown
briefly in the display at the start of each
track.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, options
include SHUFF CD for the whole CD, or
SHUF ALL to play all the tracks in the folder
in a random order.
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until SCAN is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button
select either SCAN CD or SCAN ALL.
3. Press the seek up or seek down button
again to continue listening to a track.
COMPACT DISC TRACK
COMPRESSION
With this feature on, quieter music is
boosted and louder music lowered to
minimise repeated volume adjustments.
Sony and Sony DAB
Note: Various scan modes are possible,
according to the type of CD currently
playing.
All except Sony and Sony DAB
1.
Press MENU repeatedly until COMP is
shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button
turn the function on or off.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm
your selection.
1.
Press the SCAN button once to scan
each track on an audio CD, or the first
10 seconds of each track on each folder
of a MP3 CD.
2. Press the SCAN button again to select
SCAN OFF (audio CD), or in the case
of MP3 to scan each track within a
folder.
Sony and Sony DAB
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button
scroll through the display until COMP
is shown in the display.
3. Press the button between the
navigation buttons to make your
selection.
4. Using the left or right navigation button
turn the function on or off.
5. Press the MENU button or the button
between the navigation buttons to
confirm your selection.
EJECTING COMPACT DISCS
Note: Radio reception is restored
automatically when the EJECT button is
pressed.
Note: If the EJECT button is pressed in
error, press the button again to cancel.
Note: If the CD is not removed it will be
pulled back into the audio unit.
267
Compact Disc Player
6000CD
When a CD containing audio is inserted
into the CD player the disc's directory
structure is read in. It may take a while
before playback starts and is dependant
on the quality of the disc.
Press the EJECT button at any time and
remove the CD.
Sony CD
MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD in
several ways. They can all be placed in the
root directory like a conventional audio CD,
or they can be placed in folders that may
represent, for example, an album, an artist,
or a genre.
Note: If no CD is loaded when the EJECT
button is pressed, NO CD will be shown in
the display.
Press the EJECT button at any time and
remove the CD. EJECTING and PLEASE
REMOVE will be shown in the display.
6000CD
Press the FOLDER UP button to select the
next music folder on the MP3 disc.
REPEAT COMPACT DISC
TRACKS
6000CD
Press the FOLDER DOWN button to select
the previous music folder on the MP3 disc.
1.
Press the MENU button repeatedly
until REPEAT is shown in the display.
2. Using the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN
button choose between OFF and TRK.
Sony and Sony DAB
Sony and Sony DAB
Playing a multi session disc
1. Press the MENU button.
2. using the up or down navigation
buttons scroll through the display until
REPEAT is shown in the display.
3. Using the left or right navigation
buttons select REPEAT TRACK or
REPEAT OFF.
4. Press the MENU button to confirm
your selection.
The normal playing sequence on CD's with
multiple folders is to play the tracks in the
first folder, then the tracks in any folders
nested inside the first folder, then move
onto the second folder, and so on. For
example, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1b
within it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a,
the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b,
2, 2a.
Use the up and down navigation buttons
to select the next or previous music folder
on the MP3 disc.
When the playback of a file is finished the
playback of the other files in the same
directory continues. Directory change takes
place automatically when all files in the
current directory have been played back.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, playback
options are REPEAT TRACK, REP FOLDER
and REPEAT OFF.
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK
Note: Some copy protected audio files may
not be read by the CD player.
The CD player also supports MP3 and
WMA format audio files.
268
Compact Disc Player
MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONS
When an MP3 disc is playing, certain
information encoded in each track can be
displayed. Such information will normally
include:
•
•
•
The file name
The folder name
ID3 information which might be the
album or artist’s name.
The unit will normally show the file name
that is playing. To select one of the other
items of information, press the INFO
button repeatedly until the required item
is shown in the display.
Note: If the ID3 information selected is
unavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown in
the display.
CD text display options
When an audio disc with CD text is playing,
limited information encoded in each track
can be displayed. Such information will
normally include:
•
•
•
The disc name
The artist name
The track name.
Note: These display options are selected
in the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISC
NAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shown
in the display if no information has been
encoded.
ENDING COMPACT DISC
PLAYBACK
Press the RADIO button.
Note: This will not eject the CD; the disc
will merely pause at the point where radio
reception was restored.
To resume CD playback, press the
CD/AUX button again.
269
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket
Note: For optimum performance when
using any auxiliary device set the volume on
the device high. This will reduce audio
interference when charging the device via
the vehicle power supply socket.
When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)
socket permits an auxiliary device, such as
an MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicle
audio system. Output can be played
through the vehicle speakers.
To connect an auxiliary device, plug it into
the AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mm
conventional audio jack connector.
Select the auxiliary input via the CD/AUX
button and playback will be heard through
the vehicle speakers. AUX will be shown in
the display. Volume, treble and bass can
be adjusted on the audio unit as normal.
The audio unit buttons can also be used
to restore playback from the audio unit,
while the auxiliary device remains
connected.
270
Audio Troubleshooting
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
Audio unit display
Rectification
CD ERROR
PLEASE CHECK CD
CDC ERROR
General error message for CD fault conditions, for
example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted. May
also indicate a audio unit malfunction. Make sure that
the disc is correctly loaded, clean and re- load the CD
or replace the CD with a known music CD. See Ejecting
compact discs (page 267). See Loading compact
discs (page 265). If error continues. See your dealer.
NO CD
NO CDS
NO CD #
Message to indicate that the audio unit or CD changer
is empty. Insert a CD. See Loading compact discs
(page 265).
HIGH TEMP
CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP
Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until
it has cooled down.
SLOT FULL
Message to indicate that the CD slot is already loaded.
Eject the CD from selected slot before attempting load
operation or select another slot location. See Loading
compact discs (page 265).
CDC FULL
Message to indicate that the audio unit is full. See
Ejecting compact discs (page 267).
DATA CD
An incompatible CD has been inserted, for example not
an audio CD. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).
CODE ----
Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Entering
a security code (page 254).
WAIT
Message to inform you to wait until the next keycode
entry attempt can be made. See Incorrect security
code (page 254).
TRIES
Message indicates the number of incorrect input
attempts. See Incorrect security code (page 254).
LOCKED
Message to inform you that audio unit security system
has locked the unit after repeated incorrect keycode
entries. See your dealer.
KEYCODE....
ENTER KEYCODE....
Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Entering
a security code (page 254).
INCORRECT
Message to inform you that the entered keycode is
incorrect. See Incorrect security code (page 254).
271
Telephone
Phonebook categories
GENERAL INFORMATION
Depending on your phonebook entry,
different categories can be displayed in
the audio unit.
CAUTION
Using the system with the engine off
will drain the battery.
For example:
This section describes the functions and
features of the Bluetooth mobile phone
hands free system.
M
Mobile
O
Office
The Bluetooth mobile phone part of the
system provides interaction with the audio
or navigation system and your mobile
phone. It allows you to use the audio or
navigation system to make and receive
calls without having to hold your mobile
phone.
H
Home
F
Fax
Note: Entries may be displayed without a
category attachment.
The category can also be indicated as an
icon:
Compatibility of phones
Phone
CAUTION
E87990
As no common agreement exists,
mobile phone manufacturers are able
to implement a variety of profiles in
their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,
an incompatibility can occur between the
phone and hands-free system, which in
some cases may significantly degrade the
system performance. To avoid this
situation, only recommended phones
should be used.
Mobile
E87991
Home
E87992
Office
E87993
Fax
Please visit the website www.fordmobile-connectivity.com for full details.
E87994
TELEPHONE SETUP
Making a phone an active phone
Phonebook
When using the system for the first time,
no phone is connected to the system.
After start up access to the phonebook list
can be delayed for several minutes,
depending upon the size.
Bluetooth phone
After bonding a Bluetooth phone to the
system, this becomes the active phone.
For further information refer to the phone
menu.
272
Telephone
Select the phone from the active phone
menu.
1.
The Bluetooth feature must be
activated on the phone and on the
audio unit. Make sure the Bluetooth
menu option in the audio unit is set to
ON. For information on phone settings,
refer to your phone user guide.
2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,
search for Ford Audio and select it.
3. Enter the code number shown on the
vehicle display using the phone keypad.
If no code number is shown on the
display, enter the Bluetooth PIN
number 0000 using the phone keypad.
Now enter the Bluetooth PIN number
shown on the vehicle display.
4. If your mobile phone asks you to
authorize the automatic connection,
select YES.
Turning the ignition and radio or navigation
unit back on again, the last active phone
is picked up by the system.
Note: In some cases the Bluetooth
connection must also be confirmed on the
phone.
Bond another Bluetooth phone
Bond a new Bluetooth phone as described
in the requirements for a Bluetooth
connection.
Phones stored in the system are accessible
by using the phone list on the audio unit.
Note: A maximum of six devices may be
bonded. If six Bluetooth devices have
already been bonded, one of these has to
be debonded in order to bond a new device.
Note: A phone call will be disconnected if
the audio unit is switched off. If the ignition
key is turned to the off position the phone
call will remain in progress.
BLUETOOTH SETUP
Before you can use your telephone with
your vehicle it must be bonded to the
vehicle telephone system.
TELEPHONE CONTROLS
Handling of phones
Voice, accept and reject button
Remote control
Up to six Bluetooth devices can be bonded
to the vehicle system.
1
Note: If there is an ongoing call when the
phone in use is selected as the new active
phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle
audio system.
Note: Even if connected to the car system,
your phone can still be used in the usual
way.
2
E87662
Requirements for Bluetooth
connection
1
Voice button
2
Accept and reject button
The VOICE button is used to activate or
switch off the Voice control.
The following are required before a
Bluetooth phone connection can be made.
273
Telephone
On vehicles with an accept and reject
button, phone calls can be accepted and
rejected by pressing the appropriate
button.
Note: Press and hold the seek button to
skip to the next letter in the alphabet.
5. Press the PHONE or the call accept
button to dial the selected phone
number.
Note: Some audio units have the accept
and reject buttons on the front bezel. These
operate in the same way.
Dialling a number using the address
book - Sony radio
USING THE TELEPHONE VEHICLES WITHOUT:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
You can access your phone address book
via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in
the unit display.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the seek button until the phone
book is shown.
3. Press the up/down arrow buttons to
select the desired phone number.
Note: Press and hold the up/down arrow
buttons to skip to the next letter in the
alphabet.
This chapter describes the phone functions
of the audio unit.
Note: Refer to your audio guide for details
of the controls.
An active phone must be present.
Even if connected to the audio unit, your
phone can still be used in the usual way.
4. Press the PHONE or the call accept
button to dial the selected phone
number.
Note: You can exit the phone menu by
pressing any source button CD, AM/FM or
AUX.
Dialling a number using the telephone
keypad
Making a call
Dialling a number using voice control
If you have an audio unit with a telephone
keypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):
Phone numbers can be dialled using voice
control. See Telephone commands
(page 289).
1.
Press the call accept button. Press the
PHONE button if you have a Sony
radio.
2. Dial the number using the telephone
keypad on the audio unit.
3. Press the call accept button.
Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilst
entering a phone number, press the seek left
button to erase the last digit. A long press
will erase the complete string of digits.
Dialling a number using the address
book
You can access your phone address book
via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in
the unit display.
1.
Press the PHONE or the call accept
button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Keep pressing the MENU button until
PHONEBOOK appears.
4. Press the seek buttons to select the
desired phone number.
Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.
Ending a call
Calls can be ended by pressing the call
reject button.
274
Telephone
Receiving an incoming call
Audio units without a telephone keypad
can also end a call by pressing either
PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF, or by
pressing the MODE button on the remote
control
Accepting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing
either the call accept button, the PHONE
button or the MODE button on the remote
control.
Redialling a number
1.
Press the PHONE or the call accept
button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select the CALL OUT list or the CALL
IN list. On some audio units, select the
MISSED, INCOMING or OUTGOING
calls list.
Note: If the active phone does not provide
a call out list, the last outgoing call
number/entry can be redialled.
Rejecting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing
the call reject button.
Audio units without a telephone keypad
can also reject a call by pressing either
PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF.
Receiving a second incoming call
Note: The second incoming call function
must be activated in your phone.
4. Press the seek button on the audio unit.
5. Press the PHONE or the call accept
button to dial the desired phone
number.
If there is an incoming call whilst there is
an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and
you will have the option to end the active
call and to accept the incoming call.
Redialling a number - Sony radio
Accepting a second incoming call
1.
Press the PHONE or the call accept
button.
2. Press the seek button until the desired
list is displayed.
Note: If the active phone does not provide
a call out list, the last outgoing call
number/entry can be redialled.
Second incoming calls can be accepted
by pressing either the call accept button,
the PHONE button, or the MODE button
on the remote control.
Rejecting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be rejected by
pressing the call reject button. Units
without a telephone keypad can also reject
a second incoming call by pressing the CD
button, or the AM/FM button.
3. Press the up/down buttons to select
the desired phone number.
4. Press the PHONE or the call accept
button to dial the phone number.
Muting the microphone
Redialling the last dialled number Sony radio
During a call, it is possible to mute the
microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation
will appear in the display.
1. Press the call accept button.
2. Press the call accept button a second
time to dial the number.
275
Telephone
Audio units with green call accept
button
1.
Press the call accept button. Press the
button once again to turn this function off.
2.
3.
Audio units without green call accept
button
4.
Press the seek up or down button. Press
the button once again to turn this function
off.
5.
Changing the active phone
Press the PHONE or call accept
button.
Press the MENU button on the audio
unit.
Select the DEBOND option on the
audio unit.
Scroll through the different phones by
using the seek buttons and display the
phone to be debonded.
Press the MENU button to select the
phone which is to be debonded.
Note: Phones must be bonded to the
system before they can be made active.
Debonding a bonded phone - Sony
radio
Using the station storage button
A bonded phone can be deleted from the
system at any time, unless a phone call is
in progress.
Note: This process is only for audio units
without a telephone keypad.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until
you reach the DEBOND option.
3. Scroll through the different phones by
using the seek buttons and display the
phone to be debonded.
4. Press the OK button to be debond.
1.
Press the PHONE button on the audio
unit.
2. Press the preset number required
(using the station preset buttons 1 - 6).
Using the audio unit menu
Note: After bonding a phone to the system,
this becomes the active phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
USING THE TELEPHONE VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
Press the PHONE or call accept
button.
Press the MENU button on the audio
unit.
Select the ACTIVE PHONE option on
the audio unit.
Scroll through the different stored
phones by using the seek buttons to
display the bonded phones.
Press the MENU button to select the
phone which is to be the active phone.
This chapter describes the phone functions
of the Navigation System.
Note: Refer to your Navigation System
guide for details of the controls.
An active phone must be present.
Even if connected to the Navigation
System, your phone can still be used in the
usual way.
Debonding a bonded phone
A bonded phone can be deleted from the
system at any time, unless a phone call is
in progress.
276
Telephone
Making a call
Accepting a second incoming call
Dialling a number
Second incoming calls can be accepted
by pressing either the call accept button,
the MODE button on the remote control,
the PHONE button on the unit or by using
the ACCEPT option in the menu.
Phone numbers can be dialled using voice
control. See Voice control (page 279).
Ending a call
Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.
Calls can be ended by pressing either the
END button, the MODE button on the
remote switch or the ON/OFF button on
the navigation system.
Rejecting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be rejected by
pressing either the call reject button, or one
of the following buttons on the unit: CD,
AM/FM.
Redialling a number
1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Select REDIAL.
Muting the microphone
During a call, it is possible to mute the
microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation
will appear in the display.
Receiving an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call
SD navigation units
Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing
either the call accept button, the MODE
button on the remote control, the PHONE
button on the unit or by using the ACCEPT
option in the menu.
Press the mute button (symbol of a
microphone with a line through it). Press
the button once again to turn this function
off.
Rejecting an incoming call
CD navigation units
Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing
either the call reject button, the CD or
AM/FM buttons on the unit, or by using
the REJECT option in the menu.
Press the microphone mute button. Press
the button once again to turn this function
off.
Changing the active phone
Receiving a second incoming call
Note: Phones must be bonded to the
system before they can be made active.
Note: The second incoming call function
must be activated in your phone.
Note: After bonding a phone to the system,
this becomes the active phone.
If there is an incoming call, whilst there is
an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and
you will have the option to end the active
call and to accept the incoming call.
1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Using the BT SETTINGS option in the
menu, select the active phone from the
list.
277
Telephone
Debonding a bonded phone
A bonded phone can be deleted from the
system at any time, unless a phone call is
in progress.
1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Select the BT SETTINGS option in the
menu.
3. Select the DEBOND option in the
menu.
4. Select the phone from the list.
278
Voice control
Do not try to give any commands until the
beep tone has been heard. The voice
control system will repeat each spoken
command back to you.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
CAUTION
Using the system with the engine off
will drain the battery.
If you are not sure how to continue say
"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if you
do not wish to continue.
Voice recognition enables operation of the
system without the need to divert your
attention from the road ahead in order to
change settings, or receive feedback from
the system.
The "HELP" function provides only a
subset of the available voice commands.
Detailed explanations of all possible voice
commands can be found on the following
pages.
Whenever you issue one of the defined
commands with the system active, the
voice recognition system converts your
command into a control signal for the
system. Your inputs take the form of
dialogues or commands. You are guided
through these dialogues by
announcements or questions.
Voice commands
All voice commands should be given using
a natural speaking voice, as if speaking to
a passenger or on the phone. Your voice
level should be dependant on the
surrounding noise level inside or outside
the vehicle but do not shout.
Please familiarise yourself with the
functions of the system before using voice
recognition.
USING VOICE CONTROL
Supported commands
System operation
The voice control system allows you to
control the following vehicle functions:
The order and content of the voice controls
are given in the following lists. The tables
show the sequence of user voice
commands and system responses for each
available function.
•
Bluetooth phone
•
radio
•
CD Player/CD Changer
•
external device (USB)
<> indicates a number or stored name tag
to be inserted by the user.
•
external device (iPod)
Short cuts
•
automatic climate control
•
navigation system - refer to separate
navigation handbook).
There are a number of voice command
short cuts available, which allow you to
control some vehicle features without
having to follow the complete command
menu. These are:
System response
•
As you work through a voice session the
system will prompt you with a beep tone
each time the system is ready to proceed.
•
279
Phone: CALL or DIAL NAME, DIAL
NUMBER, and REDIAL.
Phone: CALL FIRST NAME, LAST NAME
at LOCATION. Example: Call Fred
Bloggs at home.
Voice control
•
•
•
•
Name tag
CD player or CD changer: DISC and
TRACK.
Automatic climate control:
TEMPERATURE, AUTO MODE,
DEFROSTING ON, DEMISTING ON,
DEFROSTING OFF and DEMISTING
OFF.
Radio: TUNE NAME.
External device (USB, iPod and SD
card): TRACK.
The name tag functionality can support
the phone, audio and navigation features
by using the "STORE NAME" function. You
can assign name tags to items such as
favourite radio stations and personal
phone contacts. See Audio unit
commands (page 280). See Telephone
commands (page 289). See Navigation
system commands (page 294).
Start communicating with the system
Before you can start talking to the system
you first have to press the VOICE or MODE
button for each operation and wait until
the system answers with a beep. See
(page 279).
•
Store up to 20 name tags per function.
•
The average recording time for each
name tag is approximately 2-3
seconds.
AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS
Press the button again to cancel the voice
session.
CD Player
You can control playback directly by voice
control.
Overview
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
"CD PLAYER"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"
*
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"
**
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT FOLDER"
280
**
Voice control
"CD PLAYER"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.
Track
You can choose a track on your CD directly.
Steps
User says
1
"CD PLAYER"
System answer
"CD PLAYER"
2
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
"TRACK"
3
"<a number between 1 and 99>"
*
**
"TRACK <number>"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4",
"5" for track 245)
Shuffle all
To set random playback.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"CD PLAYER"
"CD PLAYER"
2
"SHUFFLE ALL"
CD Changer
Overview
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
281
Voice control
"CD CHANGER"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"DISC"
*
"TRACK"
*
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE CD"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"
**
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT CD"
"REPEAT FOLDER"
**
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.
Disc
If you have a CD changer you can choose
the disc number.
Steps
User says
1
"CD CHANGER"
System answer
"CD CHANGER"
2
"DISC"
3
"<a number between 1 and 6>"
"DISC NUMBER PLEASE"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Track
You can choose a track on your CD directly.
282
"DISC <number>"
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"CD CHANGER"
"CD CHANGER"
2
"TRACK"
3
"<a number between 1 and 99>"
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
*
"TRACK <number>"
**
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4",
"5" for track 245)
Shuffle CD
To set random playback within the CD
contents.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"CD CHANGER"
"CD CHANGER"
2
"SHUFFLE CD"
Overview
Radio
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu.
The radio voice commands support the
functionality of the radio and allow you to
tune radio stations by voice control.
"RADIO"
"HELP"
"AM"
"FM"
"TUNE NAME"
*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
283
Voice control
"RADIO"
"STORE NAME"
"PLAY"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Tune frequency
This function allows you to tune your radio
by voice commands.
Steps
User says
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"AM"
"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE"
"FM"
"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE"
3
"<frequency>"
System answer
"TUNE <frequency>"
*
* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representative
examples.
•
•
•
•
•
FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1
•
•
•
•
•
"Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)
"Ninety" (90.0)
"One hundred point five" (100.5)
"One zero one point one" (101.1)
"One zero eight" (108.0)
"Five thirty one" (531)
"Nine hundred" (900)
"Fourteen forty" (1440)
"Fifteen zero three" (1503)
"Ten eighty" (1080)
Store name
AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of
9
If you have tuned a radio station, you can
store it with a name in the directory.
AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"STORE NAME"
"STORE NAME"
"NAME PLEASE"
3
"<name>"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE"
4
"<name>"
"STORING NAME"
284
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
"<name> STORED"
Tune name
This function allows you to call up a stored
radio station.
Steps
User says
1
"RADIO"
2
"TUNE NAME"
3
"<name>"
System answer
"RADIO"
"NAME PLEASE"
*
"TUNE <name>"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Delete name
This function allows you to delete a stored
radio station.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"DELETE NAME"
"NAME PLEASE"
3
"<name>"
"DELETE <name>"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
4
"YES"
"DELETED"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
Play directory
This function allows you to let the system
tell you all of the stored radio stations.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"PLAY <DIRECTORY>"
285
Voice control
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete all
stored radio stations at once.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
3
"YES"
"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
Play
This function switches the audio source to
the radio mode.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"RADIO"
"RADIO"
2
"PLAY"
Auxiliary input
This function allows you to switch the
audio source to the attached auxiliary input
device.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
2
"LINE IN"
"LINE IN"
Overview
External devices - USB
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
These voice commands support the
functionality of an external USB device
which may be connected to the audio unit.
286
Voice control
"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"
*
"PLAYLIST"
"FOLDER"
**
**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT FOLDER"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.
See General Information (page 297).
USB play
This function allows you to switch the
audio source to the attached USB device.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
2
"USB"
"USB"
3
"PLAY"
USB Track
You can choose a track on your USB device
directly.
287
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
2
"USB"
"USB"
3
"TRACK"
4
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
"<a number between 1 and 99>"
*
"TRACK <number>"
* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4",
"5" for track 245)
Overview
External devices - iPod
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
These voice commands support the
functionality of an iPod which may be
connected to the audio unit.
"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"
*
"PLAYLIST"
**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General
Information (page 297).
iPod Track
You can choose a track off the all titles list
of your iPod directly.
288
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
2
"IPOD"
"IPOD"
3
"TRACK"
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
4
"<a number between 1 and 99>"
*
"TRACK <number>"
**
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2",
"4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.
iPod playlist
You can choose a playlist from your iPod
directly.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
"EXTERNAL DEVICE"
2
"IPOD"
"IPOD"
3
"PLAYLIST"
"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE"
4
"<a number between 1 and 10>"
*
"PLAYLIST <number>"
* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General
Information (page 297).
Overview
TELEPHONE COMMANDS
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
Phone
Your phone system allows you to create
an additional phonebook. The stored
entries can be dialled by voice control.
Phone numbers stored by using voice
control are stored on the vehicle system
and not in your phone.
289
Voice control
"PHONE"
"HELP"
"MOBILE NAME"
"DIAL NUMBER"
"DIAL NAME"
*
*
*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"STORE NAME"
"REDIAL"
*
"ACCEPT CALLS"
"REJECT CALLS"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Phone functions
Dial number
Phone numbers can be dialled after giving
the name tag voice command.
Steps
User says
1
"PHONE"
System answer
"PHONE"
2
"DIAL NUMBER"
"NUMBER PLEASE"
3
"<phone number>"
"<phone number>
CONTINUE?"
4
"DIAL"
"DIALLING"
"CORRECTION"
"<repeat last part of number>
CONTINUE?"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
290
Voice control
Dial name
Phone numbers can be dialled after giving
the name tag voice command.
Steps
User says
1
"PHONE"
System answer
"PHONE"
2
"DIAL NAME"
"NAME PLEASE"
3
"<name>"
"DIAL <name>"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
4
"YES"
"DIALLING"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Redial
This function allows you to redial the last
dialled phone number.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"REDIAL"
3
"YES"
"DIALLING"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
"REDIAL"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Mobile name
This function allows you to access phone
numbers stored with a name tag in your
mobile phone.
Steps
User says
1
"PHONE"
2
"MOBILE NAME"
System answer
"PHONE"
"MOBILE NAME" "<phone
dependent dialogue>"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
291
Voice control
DTMF (Tone dialling)
Note: DTMF can only be used during an
ongoing call. Operate the VOICE button and
wait for the system prompt.
This function transfers spoken numbers
into DTMF tones. For example, to make a
remote enquiry to your home answering
machine or to enter a PIN number etc.
Steps
Can only be used with vehicles installed with
a dedicated VOICE button.
User says
System answer
1
2
"NUMBER PLEASE"
"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"
Create a phonebook
Store name
New entries can be stored with the
"STORE NAME" command. This feature
can be used to dial a number by calling up
the name instead of the full phone number.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"STORE NAME"
"STORE NAME"
"NAME PLEASE"
3
"<name>"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE"
4
"<name>"
"STORING NAME"
"<name> STORED"
"NUMBER PLEASE"
5
"<phone number>"
"<phone number>"
6
"STORE"
"STORING NUMBER"
"<phone number>"
"NUMBER STORED"
Delete name
Stored names can also be deleted from
the directory.
292
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"DELETE NAME"
"NAME PLEASE"
3
"<name>"
"DELETE <name>"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
4
"YES"
"<name> DELETED"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
Play directory
Use this function to let the system tell you
all stored entries.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete all
entries in one go.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
3
"YES"
"DIRECTORY DELETED"
"NO"
"COMMAND CANCELLED"
Main settings
Reject calls
Calls can be set to be automatically
rejected using voice control.
293
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"PHONE"
"PHONE"
2
"REJECT CALLS"
"ACCEPT CALLS"
"REJECT CALLS"
"ACCEPT CALLS"
*
* use this command to turn the reject mode off
Overview
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
COMMANDS
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists will
give further information about the
complete command menu in selected
examples.
Please refer to your separate Navigation
manual for details of the command menus.
CLIMATE CONTROL
COMMANDS
Climate
The climate voice commands supports the
functionality of the fan speed, temperature
and mode settings. Not all functions are
available on all vehicles.
"CLIMATE"
"HELP"
*
"FAN"
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"
*
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"
"TEMPERATURE"
"AUTO MODE"
*
*
*
* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"
shortcut is not available.
294
Voice control
Fan
This function allows you to adjust the fan
speed.
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"CLIMATE"
"CLIMATE"
2
3
"‘FAN"
"FAN SPEED PLEASE"
"MINIMUM"
"FAN MINIMUM"
"<a number between 1 and 7>"
"FAN <number>"
"MAXIMUM"
"FAN MAXIMUM"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"
shortcut is not available.
Defrosting/Demisting
Steps
1
User says
System answer
"CLIMATE"
"CLIMATE"
"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING
*
2
ON"
"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING
*
OFF"
"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON"
"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING
OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Temperature
This function allows you to adjust the
temperature.
Steps
User says
1
"CLIMATE"
2
"TEMPERATURE"
3
"MINIMUM"
System answer
"CLIMATE"
*
"TEMPERATURE PLEASE"
"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM"
295
Voice control
Steps
User says
System answer
"<a number between 15 and 29 °C
with 0.5 increments>" or "<a
number between 59 and 84 °F>"
"TEMPERATURE <number>"
"MAXIMUM"
"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Auto mode
Steps
User says
System answer
1
"CLIMATE"
"CLIMATE"
2
"AUTO MODE"
"AUTO MODE"
*
* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature or
fan speed.
296
Connectivity
The system supports a range of external
devices, to fully integrate with your audio
unit via the USB and auxiliary input
sockets. Once connected, control of the
external device is possible via the audio
unit.
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTIONS
Take care when handling external
devices with exposed electrical
connectors (such as the USB plug).
Always replace the protective cap/shield
when possible. There may be a risk of
electrostatic discharge causing damage
to the device.
A list of typical compatible devices are
shown below:
• USB memory sticks
• USB portable hard drives
• Some MP3 players with USB
connection
• iPod media players (refer to
www.ford-mobile
-connectivity.com for latest
compatibility list).
Do not touch or handle the USB
socket in the vehicle. Cover the socket
when not in use.
Only use USB Mass-Storage device
compliant devices.
Always switch your audio unit to a
different source (for example the
radio) before unplugging the USB
device.
The system is USB 2.0 full speed
compatible, USB 1.1 host compliant and
supports FAT 16/32 file systems.
Do not install or connect USB hubs or
splitters.
Information on audio file
structures for external devices
USB
Note: The system is only designed to
recognize and read suitable audio files from
a USB device that conforms to the USB
Mass-Storage device class or an iPod. Not
all available USB devices can be guaranteed
to function with the system.
Create only a single partition on the USB
device.
If playlists are created, they must contain
correct file paths referenced to the USB
device. It is recommended to create the
playlist after the audio files have been
transferred to the USB device.
Note: It is possible to connect compatible
devices with a trailing USB lead as well as
those that plug into the vehicle USB socket
directly (for example USB memory sticks
and pen drives).
Playlists must be created in .m3u format.
Audio files must be in .mp3 format.
Note: Some USB devices with a higher
power consumption may not be compatible
(for example some larger hard drives).
Do not exceed the following limits:
• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and
playlists)
• 5000 folders per USB device (including
playlists)
• 8 subfolder levels.
Note: Access time to read the files on the
external device will vary depending upon
factors such as the file structure, size and
device content.
297
Connectivity
Connection
To enable voice control for custom
playlists and folders, follow the procedure
below:
• Create folders named with the
structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a
number 1-10. For example "Ford3"
without an extension.
• Create playlists named with the
structure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*>
is a number 1-10. For example
"Ford5.m3u" without any space
between "Ford" and the number.
Plug in the device, and if necessary secure
it to prevent movement within the vehicle.
Connecting an iPod
For optimum convenience and audio
quality, we recommend that you purchase
a dedicated single connection lead
available from your dealer.
Alternatively, it is possible to connect your
iPod using the standard iPod USB cable
and a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. If
using this method preset the iPod volume
to maximum and turn off any equalizer
settings before making the connections:
Thereafter, custom folders and playlists
will be selectable with voice control. See
Audio unit commands (page 280).
iPod
•
To enable voice control for custom
playlists, create playlists named with the
structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a
number 1-10. For example "Ford7" without
any space between "Ford" and the
number.
•
Connect the headphone output of the
iPod to the AUX IN socket.
Connect the USB cable from the iPod
to the vehicle USB socket.
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL
DEVICE - VEHICLES WITH:
BLUETOOTH
Thereafter, playlists will be selectable with
voice control. See Audio unit commands
(page 280).
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
device
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL
DEVICE
CAUTION
As various standards exist,
manufacturers are able to implement
a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth
devices. Because of this, an incompatibility
can occur between the Bluetooth device
and the system, which in some cases may
limit system functionality. To avoid this
situation, only recommended devices
should be used.
WARNING
Make sure the external device is
securely mounted within the vehicle,
and that trailing connections do not
obstruct any of the driving controls.
External devices may be connected using
the auxiliary input socket and the USB port.
See Auxiliary Input Socket (page 131).
See USB Port (page 131).
Please visit the website
www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com
for full details.
298
Connectivity
Bonding the device
Information not available
Note: Some audio and navigation units
have a separate Bluetooth audio menu. Use
this to access setup and control.
E100028
Sony radio
To connect the device to the system follow
the same procedure as for Bluetooth hands
free phones. See Bluetooth setup (page
273).
Operation
Select the USB device as the audio source
by repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX
button until USB appears in the display.
After first connecting the USB device, the
first track within the first folder will start
to play automatically. Subsequently,
following audio source switching, the
position of playback on the USB device is
remembered.
Operating the device
Select Bluetooth audio as the active
source.
Tracks can be accessed by skipping
forwards and backwards using the steering
wheel controls, or directly from the audio
unit controls.
To browse the device contents, press the
up/down arrow key or the OK button once.
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example a
folder named after an album, with
individual album tracks within that
folder).
• "<" before the list indicates that a
further level up is readable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder text
indicate the type of file/folder. Refer
to the list for an explanation of these
icons.
USING A USB DEVICE
Various icons are used to identify types of
audio file, folders etc.
USB device is the active source
E100029
Folder
E100022
Playlist
E100023
Album
E100024
Artist
To navigate the USB device contents, use
the up/down arrow keys to scroll through
lists, and the left/right keys to move up or
down within the folder hierarchy. Once your
desired track, playlist or folder is
highlighted, press the OK button to select
playback.
E100025
Filename
E100026
Track title
Note: If you wish to jump to the top level
of the USB device contents, press and hold
the left arrow key.
E100027
299
Connectivity
Audio control
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example a
folder named after an album, with
individual album tracks within that
folder).
• "<" to the left hand side of the display
indicates that a further level up is
readable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder text
indicate the type of file/folder. Refer
to the list for an explanation of these
icons.
Press the left and right arrow keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to
enable fast rewind/fast forward through
track content.
Press the up/down arrow key or the OK
button to browse the device contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the USB
menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and
repeat functions here with respect to
folders and playlists.
Press the SCAN button to scan the whole
device, current folder or a playlist if it is in
operation.
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
To navigate the USB device contents, use
the rotary scroll/select button to browse
through lists. Push the button to expand
the contents within the highlighted playlist
or folder, or to commence playback of a
particular track. Press ESC to go up one
level.
Repeated button presses will scroll
through these displays.
Audio control
CD Navigation units
Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Operation
Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable
fast rewind/fast forward through track
content.
Select the USB device as the audio source
by pressing the CD/AUX button until
DEVICES appears in the display. Select
DEVICES and then select USB from the
available device list. After first connecting
the USB device, the first track within the
first folder will start to play automatically.
Subsequently, following audio source
switching, the position of playback on the
USB device is remembered.
Rotate or press the SELECT button to
browse the device contents.
Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to
enable shuffle and repeat functions with
respect to folders and playlists. Different
options may appear depending upon
whether or not a playlist is in operation.
Press the SCAN button to scan the current
playlist if it is in operation, or the complete
USB device or folder.
To browse the device contents, press the
SELECT button once.
300
Connectivity
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
•
•
"<" to the left hand side of the display
indicates that a further level up is
readable.
Icons to the left of track/folder text
indicate the type of file/folder. Refer
to the list for an explanation of these
icons.
To navigate the USB device contents, use
the scroll buttons to browse through lists.
Push the button to expand the contents
within the highlighted playlist or folder, or
to commence playback of a particular
track. Press the left arrow key to go up one
level.
SD Navigation units
Operation
Select the USB device as the audio source
by pressing the CD/AUX button until the
USB button appears to the left of the
display. Select USB from the available
device list.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Note: Some devices may be shown but not
selectable, depending if the device is
connected or not.
Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable
fast rewind/fast forward through track
content.
After first connecting the USB device, the
first track within the first folder will start
to play automatically. Subsequently,
following audio source switching, the
position of playback on the USB device is
remembered.
Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse
the device contents.
Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to
enable shuffle and repeat functions with
respect to folders and playlists.
To browse the device contents, press the
scroll up or down arrow button.
Press the SCAN button to scan the current
playlist if it is in operation, or the complete
USB device or folder.
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example a
folder named after an album, with
individual album tracks within that
folder).
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
USING AN IPOD
Various icons are used to identify types of
audio file, folders etc.
301
Connectivity
iPod is the active source
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example all
albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a
further level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates the
type of the currently displayed list (for
example list of albums). Refer to the
list for an explanation of these icons.
E100030
iPod playlist
E100031
iPod artist
E100032
iPod album
E100033
iPod genre
E100034
iPod song
To navigate the iPod contents, use the
up/down arrow keys to scroll through lists,
and the left/right keys to move up or down
within the hierarchy. Once your desired
track, playlist, album, artist or genre is
highlighted, press the OK button to select
playback.
E100035
iPod generic category
E100036
iPod generic media file
Sony radio
Note: If you wish to jump to the top level
of the iPod contents, press and hold the left
arrow key.
Operation
Audio control
Connect the iPod. See Connecting an
external device (page 298).
Press the left and right arrow keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Select the iPod as the audio source by
repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX button
until iPod appears in the display.
Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to
enable fast rewind/fast forward through
track content.
The iPod menu list for browsing contents
will be available through the radio display.
Navigation of the contents follows the
same principles as for iPod standalone use
(for example search by artist, title, etc.).
To browse the iPod contents, press the
up/down arrow key or the OK button once.
Press the up/down arrow key or the OK
button to browse the iPod contents.
E100037
Press the MENU key to enter the iPod
menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and
repeat functions here. It is also possible to
enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option
directly from the top level.
Press the SCAN button to scan the
currently selected tracks.
302
Connectivity
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
To navigate the iPod contents, use the
rotary scroll/select button to browse
through lists. Push the button to expand
the contents within the highlighted playlist,
album, artist, genre or to commence
playback of a particular track. Press ESC
to go up one level.
Repeated button presses will scroll
through these displays.
Audio control
CD Navigation units
Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Operation
Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable
fast rewind/fast forward through track
content.
Connect the iPod. See Connecting an
external device (page 298).
Select the iPod as the audio source by
pressing the CD/AUX button until
DEVICES appears in the display. Select
DEVICES and then select iPod from the
available device list.
Rotate or press the SELECT button to
browse the iPod contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the iPod
menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and
repeat functions here. It is also possible to
enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option
directly from the top level.
The iPod menu list for browsing contents
will be available through the display.
Navigation of the contents follows the
same principles as for iPod standalone use
(for example search by artist, title, etc.).
To browse the iPod contents, press the
SELECT button once.
Press the SCAN button to scan the
currently selected tracks.
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example all
albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a
further level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates the
type of the currently displayed list (for
example list of albums). Refer to the
list for an explanation of these icons.
SD Navigation units
Operation
Connect the iPod. See Connecting an
external device (page 298).
Select the iPod as the audio source by
pressing the CD/AUX button until the iPod
button appears to the left of the display.
Select iPod from the available device list.
Note: Some devices may be shown but not
selectable, depending if the device is
connected or not.
303
Connectivity
The iPod menu list for browsing contents
will be available through the display.
Navigation of the contents follows the
same principles as for iPod standalone use
(for example search by artist, title, etc.).
To browse the iPod contents, press the
scroll up or down arrow button.
Press the SCAN button to scan the
currently selected tracks.
Press the INFO button to display the
following:
• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
The display will show the track
information, together with other important
information described below:
• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current position
of the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a further
level down is readable (for example all
albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a
further level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates the
type of the currently displayed list (for
example list of albums). Refer to the
list for an explanation of these icons.
To navigate the iPod contents, use the
scroll buttons to browse through lists. Push
the button to expand the contents within
the highlighted playlist, album, artist, genre
or to commence playback of a particular
track. Press the left arrow key to go up one
level.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip
backwards and forwards through tracks.
Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable
fast rewind/fast forward through track
content.
Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse
the iPod contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the iPod
menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and
repeat functions here. It is also possible to
enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option
directly from the top level.
304
Appendices
www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity
TYPE APPROVALS
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ford Motor Company
is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective
owners.
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
TYPE APPROVALS
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
FCC ID: WJLRX-42
TYPE APPROVALS
IC: 7847A-RX42
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
RX-42 - declaration of conformity
E114214
We, the party responsible for compliance,
declare under our sole responsibility that
the Handset Integration product RX-42 is
in conformity with the provisions of the
following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A
copy of the Declaration of Conformity can
be found at:
© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.
305
Appendices
E114220
Certificate for United Arab
Emirates
TYPE APPROVALS
EU Declaration
Hereby, Valeo declares that this short
range device is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
E125209
306
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNINGS
The RF (radio frequency) transmitter
equipment (e.g. cellular telephones,
amateur radio transmitters etc.) may
only be fitted to your vehicle if they comply
with the parameters shown in the table
below. There are no special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
WARNINGS
Your vehicle has been tested and
certified to legislations relating to
electromagnetic compatibility
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or
other applicable local requirements). It is
your responsibility to ensure that any
equipment you have fitted complies with
applicable local legislations. Have any
equipment fitted by properly trained
technicians.
Do not mount any transceiver,
microphones, speakers, or any other
item in the deployment path of the
airbag system.
Do not fasten antenna cables to
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 10 centimetres (4 inches) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
1
2
3
4
E85998
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)
Antenna Positions
1 – 30
50 W
3, 4
30 – 54
50 W
1, 2, 3
68 – 87.5
50 W
1, 2, 3
307
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)
Antenna Positions
142 – 176
50 W
1, 2, 3
380 – 512
50 W
1, 2, 3
806 – 940
10 W
1, 2, 3
1200 – 1400
10 W
1, 2, 3
1710 – 1885
10 W
1, 2, 3
1885 – 2025
10 W
1, 2, 3
Note: After the installation of RF
transmitters, check for disturbances from
and to all electrical equipment in the
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit
modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• with the ignition ON
• with the engine running
• during a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside the vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
308
Index
A
At a Glance.........................................................11
Adjusting the steering wheel............................15
Autolamps...............................................................16
Automatic climate control................................18
Automatic main beam control........................16
Automatic transmission....................................20
Autowipers...............................................................15
Blind spot information system (BLIS)...........17
Changing the wiper blades ...............................15
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)..........................19
Driver alert................................................................21
Electric child safety locks...................................14
Electric folding mirrors.........................................17
Electric windows...................................................16
Engine idle speed after starting.......................18
Fuel filler flap..........................................................19
Information displays.............................................17
Instrument panel overview - left-hand
drive........................................................................11
Instrument panel overview - right-hand
drive.......................................................................12
Keyless entry...........................................................14
Keyless starting......................................................18
Lane departure warning.....................................21
Manual climate control.......................................17
Manual transmission..........................................20
Rear view camera................................................20
Reverse mirror dipping.........................................17
Speed limiter...........................................................21
Towing the vehicle on four wheels..................21
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................108
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................154
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................154
ACC
See: Adaptive cruise control (ACC).............167
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation..............................................7
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............168
Active suspension........................................159
Principle of Operation.......................................159
Active suspension
See: Using active suspension........................159
Adaptive cruise control (ACC).................167
Principle of Operation.......................................167
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............168
Adaptive Headlamps....................................59
Cornering lamps...................................................60
Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles
With: Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon
Headlamps....................................................58
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49
AFS
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83
Switching the chimes on and off...................83
See: Adaptive Headlamps................................59
Audio Control..................................................49
Air Conditioning
Mode.........................................................................49
Seek..........................................................................50
See: Climate Control.........................................108
Air Vents..........................................................108
Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........262
Front air vents......................................................108
Rear air vents.......................................................108
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................262
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................262
Alarm..................................................................46
Alternative frequencies.............................263
Audio introduction......................................250
Audio menu control....................................256
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................263
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................263
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with
Bluetooth.........................................................258
Appendices....................................................305
Arming the alarm...........................................48
Arming the engine immobiliser................45
Ashtray.............................................................128
Audio System Security..............................254
Audio troubleshooting................................271
Audio Troubleshooting................................271
Audio Unit Clock and Date
Displays........................................................255
Principle of Operation........................................46
Front ashtray........................................................128
Rear ashtray..........................................................128
309
Index
Audio unit commands...............................280
Auxiliary Heater..............................................114
Auxiliary input.....................................................286
CD Changer...........................................................281
CD Player..............................................................280
External devices - iPod....................................288
External devices - USB....................................286
Radio......................................................................283
Changing the remote control battery...........117
Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on
country)..............................................................118
Feedback during starting and switching
off.........................................................................116
Fuel operated heater (depending on
country)..............................................................117
Parking heater.......................................................114
Programming the transmitter.........................117
Remote start in combination with direct
start or timer.....................................................116
Remote starting...................................................116
Audio unit menus........................................262
Audio unit operation...................................256
Audio unit overview......................................251
Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................75
Autolamps........................................................56
Automatic Climate Control.........................111
Air distribution.......................................................112
Blower......................................................................112
Mono mode............................................................112
Recirculated air.....................................................113
Setting the temperature....................................112
Switching off the automatic climate
control.................................................................113
Switching the air conditioning on and
off..........................................................................113
To switch mono mode back on......................112
To switch mono mode off................................112
Windscreen defrosting and demisting........113
Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............270
Auxiliary Input Socket..................................131
Auxiliary Power Points................................128
Automatic Main Beam Control.................56
Battery connection points........................228
Blind Spot Monitor.........................................76
B
Balance/fade control.................................256
6000CD................................................................256
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................256
Bass/treble control.....................................256
6000CD................................................................256
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................256
Activating the system.........................................57
Manually overriding the system......................57
Setting the system sensitivity..........................57
Blind spot information system (BLIS).........76
Detection errors.....................................................77
System detection and alerts............................76
Turning the system on and off.........................77
Using the system..................................................76
Automatic Transmission.............................151
Drive modes..........................................................152
Emergency park position release
lever.....................................................................152
Hints on driving with an automatic
transmission....................................................152
Selector lever positions.....................................151
Bluetooth setup............................................273
Handling of phones...........................................273
Requirements for Bluetooth
connection.......................................................273
Automatic volume control.......................262
Bonnet Lock
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................262
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................262
See: Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......208
Booster cables
Autostore control........................................258
See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................227
6000CD................................................................259
Sony CD.................................................................259
Booster Seats..................................................23
Booster cushion (Group 3)...............................24
Booster seat (Group 2)......................................23
Autowipers.........................................................51
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................221
Brakes...............................................................154
Principle of Operation.......................................154
Bulb changing
See: Changing a Bulb.........................................64
310
Index
Bulb Specification Chart.............................70
Child Safety......................................................22
Child Safety Locks.........................................28
C
Electric child safety locks..................................29
Manual child safety locks..................................28
Capacities and Specifications................246
Child Seat Positioning..................................24
Child Seats........................................................22
Technical Specifications.................................246
Cargo Nets......................................................183
Child restraints for different mass
groups..................................................................22
Luggage retention net.......................................183
Car Wash
Cigar Lighter....................................................127
Cleaning the Exterior..................................225
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................225
Catalytic Converter......................................144
Body paintwork preservation........................226
Cleaning the alloy wheels...............................225
Cleaning the chrome trim...............................225
Cleaning the headlamps.................................225
Cleaning the rear window...............................225
Driving with a catalytic converter.................144
CD changer.......................................................131
Changing a Bulb.............................................64
Approach lamp.....................................................66
Central high mounted brake lamp................68
Daytime running lamps.....................................65
Front fog lamps.....................................................67
Headlamp...............................................................64
Interior lamps........................................................68
Luggage compartment lamp..........................70
Number plate lamp.............................................68
Reading lamps......................................................69
Rear lamps..............................................................67
Side repeater.........................................................66
Vanity mirror lamp...............................................70
Cleaning the Interior...................................226
Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,
radio screens..................................................226
Rear windows......................................................226
Seat belts..............................................................226
Climate Control............................................108
Principle of Operation......................................108
Climate control commands....................294
Climate..................................................................294
Clock..................................................................127
Coded keys.......................................................45
Cold Weather Precautions........................192
Compact disc playback............................266
Changing a Fuse...........................................195
Changing a Road Wheel...........................229
Assembling the wheel brace.........................232
Installing a road wheel....................................234
Jacking and lifting points................................230
Locking wheel nuts...........................................229
Removing a road wheel...................................233
Removing the wheel trim................................232
Vehicle jack..........................................................229
Vehicles with a temporary spare
wheel.................................................................229
Compact disc changer playback.................266
Compact Disc Player..................................265
Compact disc track compression..........267
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................267
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................267
Compact disc track scanning..................267
6000CD................................................................267
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................267
Connecting an external device...............298
Changing the remote control
battery.............................................................35
Connection..........................................................298
Connecting an external device - Vehicles
With: Bluetooth.........................................298
Remote control with a folding key
blade....................................................................35
Remote control without a folding key
blade....................................................................36
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
device................................................................298
Connectivity...................................................297
Changing the Vehicle Battery.................228
Changing the Wiper Blades........................53
General Information..........................................297
Convenience features..................................127
Coolant Check
Rear window wiper blades...............................53
Windscreen wiper blades..................................53
See: Engine Coolant Check............................220
Checking the Wiper Blades........................52
311
Index
Cruise Control................................................165
Electric exterior mirrors................................74
Principle of Operation.......................................165
See: Using Cruise Control................................165
Electric folding mirrors........................................74
Mirror tilting positions.........................................74
Reverse mirror dipping........................................75
Cup Holders....................................................129
Electric sunroof..............................................118
Cruise control
Opening and closing the sunroof..................119
Opening and closing the sunroof
automatically...................................................119
Sunroof anti-trap protection...........................119
Sunroof relearning.............................................120
Sunroof safety mode........................................120
Tilting the sunroof...............................................119
D
Daytime Running Lamps............................56
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................138
Regeneration........................................................138
Digital signal processing (DSP).............262
Electromagnetic compatibility...............307
Ending compact disc playback..............269
Engine Block Heater....................................138
Engine Coolant Check...............................220
Changing the DSP settings............................262
DSP equaliser......................................................262
DSP occupancy..................................................262
Direction Indicators........................................61
Disabling the passenger airbag................33
Checking the coolant level.............................220
Topping up.............................................................221
Disabling the passenger airbag......................34
Enabling the passenger airbag.......................34
Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation
switch...................................................................33
Engine immobiliser........................................45
Principle of Operation........................................45
Engine Oil Check..........................................220
Disarming the alarm.....................................48
Checking the oil level.......................................220
Topping up...........................................................220
Vehicles with keyless entry..............................48
Vehicles without keyless entry.......................48
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)..........................................219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)
Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)
Diesel.............................................................220
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi
(Sigma).........................................................219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE
(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)..............219
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
(MI4)..............................................................219
Entering a security code............................254
Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45
Dog Guard.......................................................184
Installing behind the front seats...................185
Installing behind the rear seats.....................185
DPF
See: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................138
Driver Alert.......................................................175
Principle of Operation.......................................175
Driving Hints...................................................192
Driving Through Water................................192
Driving through water .......................................192
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................56
6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................254
Exterior Mirrors.................................................74
E
Manual folding mirrors.......................................74
F
Eco Mode.........................................................142
Principle of Operation.......................................142
Ejecting compact discs..............................267
Fastening the seat belts...............................32
Fast forward/reverse..................................266
6000CD................................................................268
Sony CD................................................................268
All except Sony and Sony DAB....................266
Sony and Sony DAB.........................................266
First Aid Kit......................................................193
Floor Mats........................................................132
312
Index
Fog Lamps - Front
Glove Box.........................................................129
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................57
Cooled glove box................................................129
Fog Lamps - Rear
H
See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................58
Forward alert function................................172
Handbrake
Adjusting the warning sensitivity..................172
Switching the system on and off..................172
See: Parking Brake.............................................154
Front Fog Lamps.............................................57
Fuel and Refuelling......................................143
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60
Headlamp adjustment
Technical Specifications..................................146
See: Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With:
Adaptive Front Lighting/Xenon
Headlamps........................................................58
Fuel Burning Heater
See: Auxiliary Heater..........................................114
Fuel Consumption.......................................146
Fuel Consumption
Headlamp Levelling......................................58
Recommended headlamp levelling switch
positions.............................................................58
See: Technical Specifications........................146
Fuel filler flap.................................................144
Headlamp Washers.......................................52
Head Restraints.............................................124
Refuelling with a fuel can................................146
Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................143
Long-term storage.............................................144
Adjusting the head restraint...........................124
Removing the head restraint..........................124
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................143
Heated Seats..................................................125
Long-term storage.............................................143
Raising and Lowering the
Temperature....................................................125
Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................143
Fuse Box Locations......................................194
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................113
Central fuse box..................................................194
Engine compartment fuse box.....................194
Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door.............194
Rear fuse box - Estate......................................195
Heated exterior mirrors......................................113
Heated windows..................................................113
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................108
Fuses.................................................................194
Fuse Specification Chart...........................196
Hill launch assist (HLA)
See: Using hill start assist...............................156
Hill Start Assist..............................................156
Central fuse box................................................200
Engine compartment fuse box.....................196
Rear fuse box......................................................202
Principle of Operation.......................................156
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................154
HLA
G
See: Hill Start Assist..........................................156
See: Using hill start assist...............................156
Gauges................................................................79
Engine coolant temperature gauge..............80
Fuel gauge...............................................................81
I
Gearbox
Ignition Switch...............................................133
Immobiliser
See: Transmission...............................................151
General Driving Points - Vehicles With:
Sports Suspension....................................192
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................35
Glasses Holder................................................131
Global Opening and Closing.....................40
See: Engine immobiliser....................................45
Important audio information..................250
Audio unit labels................................................250
Disc labels............................................................250
Incorrect security code..............................254
Information Displays.....................................85
Global closing.........................................................41
Global opening.......................................................41
General Information............................................85
313
Index
J
Information Messages.................................98
Active suspension................................................99
Airbag.......................................................................99
Alarm........................................................................99
Automatic main beam control, Lane
departure warning and Driver alert..........99
Battery and charging system........................100
Blind spot monitor.............................................100
Child power lock..................................................101
Climate control....................................................101
Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control
(ACC)..................................................................101
Doors open............................................................101
Engine immobiliser............................................102
Hill start assist.....................................................102
Keyless system....................................................102
Lighting...................................................................103
Maintenance........................................................104
Message indicator...............................................98
Message symbols................................................98
Occupant protection........................................104
Parking brake.......................................................104
Power steering....................................................104
Stability control (ESP).....................................105
Start-stop.............................................................105
Transmission........................................................105
Tyre pressure monitoring system.................106
Viewing current messages...............................98
Voice control.........................................................107
Jump starting
See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................227
Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................227
To connect the booster cables......................227
To start the engine............................................228
K
Keyless Entry.....................................................41
Disabled keys.........................................................43
General information.............................................41
Locking and unlocking the doors with the
key blade............................................................44
Locking the vehicle..............................................42
Passive key..............................................................42
Unlocking the vehicle..........................................43
Keyless Starting.............................................133
Failure to start......................................................134
Ignition on..............................................................133
Starting a diesel engine....................................134
Starting with automatic
transmission....................................................134
Starting with manual transmission.............134
Stopping the engine when the vehicle is
moving...............................................................135
Stopping the engine with the vehicle
stationary..........................................................135
Instrument Cluster.........................................79
Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................127
Interior Lamps..................................................61
Keys and Remote Controls.........................35
L
Courtesy lamp........................................................61
LED Interior lighting..............................................61
Reading lamps.......................................................61
Vanity mirror lamps.............................................63
Lane Departure Warning............................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
Lighting Control..............................................55
Introduction.........................................................7
iPod connection
Headlamp flasher................................................55
Home safe lighting...............................................55
Lighting control positions.................................55
Main and dipped beam......................................55
Parking lamps........................................................55
See: Connecting an external device...........298
See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles
With: Bluetooth.............................................298
iPod
Lighting..............................................................55
Load Carriers
See: Using an iPod.............................................301
ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............184
Attaching a child seat with top tethers........27
Top tether anchor points...................................27
Load Carrying.................................................179
General Information...........................................179
Loading compact discs.............................265
6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................265
314
Index
Loading the compact disc
changer.........................................................265
Load Retaining Fixtures.............................186
Manual Seats..................................................121
Adjusting the angle of the seatback............122
Adjusting the height of the driver’s
seat......................................................................122
Adjusting the lumbar support........................122
Moving the seats backwards and
forwards.............................................................121
Installing the load bracket...............................187
Installing the load retaining fixtures...........186
Locking and Unlocking.................................38
Automatic relocking...........................................40
Central locking......................................................38
Double locking.......................................................38
Double locking the doors with the key.........38
Locking and unlocking confirmation............38
Locking and unlocking the doors and the
luggage compartment lid with the
remote control.................................................39
Locking and unlocking the doors from
inside....................................................................39
Locking and unlocking the doors with the
key.........................................................................38
Luggage compartment lid................................40
Reprogramming the unlocking
function..............................................................40
Manual Transmission...................................151
Map Pockets..................................................130
Memory Function.........................................130
Recalling a stored seat position.....................131
Resetting the memory.......................................131
Setting a memory pre-set...............................130
Message Centre
See: Information Displays.................................85
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................113
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................72
MP3 connection
See: Connecting an external device...........298
See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles
With: Bluetooth.............................................298
Locks...................................................................38
Lost security code.......................................254
Luggage Anchor Points...............................179
MP3 display options...................................269
CD text display options...................................269
MP3 file playback........................................268
4-door and 5-door.............................................180
Estate......................................................................179
6000CD................................................................268
Playing a multi session disc..........................268
Sony and Sony DAB.........................................268
Luggage Covers.............................................182
Stowing the luggage cover - Estate without
full size spare wheel.....................................183
N
M
Maintenance.................................................208
Navigation system commands..............294
News broadcasts.........................................264
General Information.........................................208
Technical Specifications.................................222
All except Sony and Sony DAB....................264
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................264
Manual Climate Control............................109
O
Air conditioning....................................................110
Air distribution control.....................................109
Blower....................................................................109
Heating the interior quickly............................109
Recirculated air...................................................109
Ventilation..............................................................110
Occupant protection....................................30
Principle of Operation........................................30
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................220
On/off control...............................................256
Opening and Closing the Bonnet..........208
Closing the bonnet...........................................209
Opening the bonnet.........................................208
315
Index
P
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182
Manoeuvring with the parking aid...............160
Switching the parking aid on and off.........160
Vehicles with a sliding loadspace
floor.....................................................................182
Vehicles without a sliding loadspace
floor.....................................................................182
Parking Aids...................................................160
Rear view camera.........................................162
Parking Aid......................................................160
Principle of Operation......................................160
Principle of Operation.......................................162
Parking Brake.................................................154
Personalised Settings..................................96
Rear View Camera........................................162
Activating the rear view camera...................162
Deactivating the rear view camera..............164
Using the display................................................162
Vehicles with parking aid.................................164
Help screen, radio, navigation and phone
information........................................................96
Language.................................................................97
Navigation information......................................96
Units of measure..................................................97
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52
Intermittent wipe..................................................52
Reverse gear wipe................................................52
Washer.....................................................................52
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................38
Refuelling - E85............................................146
Refuelling........................................................146
Regional mode (REG)................................263
Power Seats....................................................122
2-way electric seat.............................................122
8-way electric seat.............................................123
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................263
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................264
Power Steering Fluid Check......................221
Topping up............................................................222
Remote control battery
Power Windows..............................................72
See: Changing the remote control
battery.................................................................35
Anti-trap function.................................................73
Driver’s door switches.........................................72
Front and rear passengers’ door
switches..............................................................72
Global opening and global closing................72
Opening and closing the windows
automatically....................................................72
Resetting the memory of the electric
windows..............................................................73
Safety mode...........................................................73
Safety switch for rear windows.......................72
Remote control programming
See: Programming the remote control........35
Removing a Headlamp................................63
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............226
Repeat compact disc tracks...................268
6000CD................................................................268
Sony and Sony DAB.........................................268
Replacement Parts
Recommendation..........................................7
Look for the Ford logo on the following
parts .......................................................................8
Now you can be sure that your Ford parts
are Ford parts.......................................................7
Programming the remote control............35
Programming a new remote control.............35
Reprogramming the unlocking
function...............................................................35
Roadside Emergencies...............................193
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................184
R
Roof rack................................................................184
Running-In.......................................................192
Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58
Rear Seats.......................................................124
Brakes and clutch...............................................192
Engine.....................................................................192
Tyres........................................................................192
Creating a level load floor................................124
Folding the seatbacks down..........................124
Folding the seatbacks up.................................125
S
Safety Precautions.......................................143
316
Index
Seat belt height adjustment......................32
Seat belt reminder.........................................33
Steering Wheel Lock...................................135
Vehicles with keyless starting........................135
Vehicles without keyless starting.................135
Deactivating the seat belt reminder..............33
Seat belts
Steering Wheel...............................................49
Storage compartments..............................129
Sunroof
See: Fastening the seat belts...........................32
Seat memory function
See: Memory Function.....................................130
See: Electric sunroof..........................................118
Seats...................................................................121
Security code................................................254
Setting the clock and date on the audio
unit.................................................................255
Sun Shades.....................................................127
Switching Off the Engine...........................138
6000CD................................................................255
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................255
Symbols in this handbook...................................7
Symbols on your vehicle.......................................7
Vehicles with a turbocharger.........................138
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Shuffle/random...........................................266
T
6000CD................................................................266
Sony CD and Sony CD DAB............................267
Sitting in the Correct Position...................121
Sliding Loadspace Floor............................180
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............246
Telephone commands..............................289
Storage compartment.......................................181
Snow Chains
See: Cruise Control............................................165
Create a phonebook.........................................292
Main settings.......................................................293
Phone.....................................................................289
Phone functions................................................290
Speed Limiter.................................................173
Telephone controls......................................273
See: Using Snow Chains.................................239
Speed Control
Principle of Operation.......................................173
Remote control...................................................273
Stability Control............................................155
Telephone setup...........................................272
Principle of Operation.......................................155
Starting a Diesel Engine.............................137
Bond another Bluetooth phone....................273
Making a phone an active phone.................272
Phonebook...........................................................272
Phonebook categories.....................................272
Cold or hot engine...............................................137
Telephone.......................................................272
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................133
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........133
General Information..........................................272
Telephone
General Information..........................................133
Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................137
See: Using the telephone - Vehicles With:
Navigation System.......................................276
See: Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:
Navigation System........................................274
Starting at low ambient temperatures
...............................................................................137
Starting a Petrol Engine.............................136
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................234
Cold or hot engine..............................................136
Engine idle speed after starting....................136
Flooded engine....................................................136
Checking the tyre pressure.............................237
General information..........................................235
Inflating the tyre.................................................236
Using the tyre repair kit....................................235
Start-Stop.......................................................140
Principle of Operation......................................140
Station preset buttons..............................258
Station tuning control...............................260
DAB service linking...........................................260
Manual tuning......................................................261
Scan tuning...........................................................261
Seek tuning..........................................................260
317
Index
Tow Ball...........................................................188
Tyre Pressures
Driving with a trailer..........................................190
Driving without a trailer.....................................191
Inserting the tow ball arm...............................189
Maintenance.........................................................191
Removing the tow ball arm............................190
Unlocking the tow ball arm
mechanism......................................................189
See: Technical Specifications.......................240
Tyre Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................234
Tyres
See: Wheels and Tyres....................................229
U
Towing a Trailer.............................................188
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)...............210
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel....................215
Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost
SCTi (Sigma)................................................211
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L
Duratec-HE (MI4)......................................212
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................216
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost
SCTi (MI4)....................................................213
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................218
Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L
Duratec-HE (MI4)......................................214
Unloading the compact disc
changer........................................................266
USB Port............................................................131
USB
Steep gradients...................................................188
Towing Points...............................................206
Installing the towing eye................................206
Towing eye location..........................................206
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.........................................................206
All vehicles...........................................................206
Vehicles with automatic
transmission...................................................207
Towing..............................................................188
Track selection..............................................265
All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................265
Sony and Sony DAB..........................................265
Traffic information control.......................259
Activating traffic announcements..............259
Ending traffic announcements....................260
Local or distant traffic.....................................259
To adjust the preset volume.........................260
Traffic announcement volume....................260
Transmission...................................................151
Trip Computer.................................................94
See: Using a USB device.................................299
Using active suspension............................159
Average fuel consumption...............................94
Average speed.......................................................94
Distance to empty...............................................94
Odometer...............................................................94
Outside air temperature....................................94
Tripmeter.................................................................94
Type 1 and 2............................................................95
Type 3.......................................................................95
Selecting a setting.............................................159
System malfunction..........................................159
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................168
Automatic deactivation.....................................171
Changing the set speed...................................169
Setting a speed...................................................169
Setting the vehicle gap.....................................170
Switching the system off..................................171
Switching the system on.................................169
Temporarily deactivating the system...........171
Type approvals.............................................305
Certificate for United Arab Emirates..........306
EU Declaration...................................................306
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............305
RX-42 - declaration of conformity.............305
Using an iPod.................................................301
CD Navigation units..........................................303
SD Navigation units..........................................303
Sony radio............................................................302
Tyre Care.........................................................238
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........239
Checking the tyre pressures..........................240
Setting the vehicle load..................................240
318
Index
Using a USB device....................................299
Using the telephone - Vehicles With:
Navigation System...................................276
CD Navigation units.........................................300
SD Navigation units...........................................301
Sony radio............................................................299
Changing the active phone.............................277
Debonding a bonded phone..........................278
Making a call.........................................................277
Muting the microphone....................................277
Receiving an incoming call..............................277
Receiving a second incoming call................277
Using Cruise Control....................................165
Cancelling the set speed.................................165
Changing the set speed...................................165
Resuming the set speed..................................166
Setting a speed...................................................165
Switching cruise control off...........................166
Switching cruise control on............................165
Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:
Navigation System....................................274
Resetting Eco mode..........................................142
Changing the active phone............................276
Debonding a bonded phone..........................276
Debonding a bonded phone - Sony
radio...................................................................276
Making a call........................................................274
Muting the microphone...................................275
Receiving an incoming call.............................275
Receiving a second incoming call................275
Using hill start assist...................................156
Using voice control......................................279
Activating the system........................................157
Deactivating the system..................................158
Name tag..............................................................280
System operation...............................................279
Using lane departure warning..................177
Using Winter Tyres......................................238
Using driver alert...........................................175
Resetting the system.........................................176
Switching the system on and off..................175
System display.....................................................176
System warnings.................................................175
Using Eco mode............................................142
Setting the steering wheel vibration
level.....................................................................178
Setting the system sensitivity........................178
Switching the system on and off...................177
System warnings.................................................178
V
Vehicle battery..............................................227
Vehicle Care...................................................225
Vehicle Identification Number................245
Vehicle Identification Plate......................244
Vehicle identification..................................244
Vehicle recovery...........................................206
Ventilated Seats............................................126
Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33
Using Snow Chains.....................................239
Vehicles with stability control (ESP).........239
Using Stability Control................................155
Vehicles without stability control (ESP)
switch.................................................................155
Vehicles with stability control (ESP)
switch.................................................................155
Raising and Lowering the
Temperature....................................................126
Ventilation
Using start-stop...........................................140
See: Climate Control.........................................108
Vents
To re-start the engine........................................141
To stop the engine.............................................140
See: Air Vents.......................................................108
Using the speed limiter...............................173
VIN
Intentionally exceeding the speed
limit......................................................................173
Setting the speed limit......................................173
System warnings.................................................174
See: Vehicle Identification Number............245
Voice control..................................................279
Principle of Operation......................................279
319
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................81
ABS warning lamp................................................81
Airbag warning lamp...........................................81
Blind spot monitor indicator.............................81
Brake system lamp...............................................81
Coolant temperature warning lamp..............81
Direction indicators..............................................82
Engine warning lamp..........................................82
Forward alert indicator.......................................82
Front fog lamp indicator....................................82
Frost warning lamp.............................................82
Glow plug indicator.............................................82
Headlamp indicator............................................82
Ignition warning lamp.........................................82
Lane departure warning indicator.................82
Low fuel level warning lamp............................83
Main beam indicator...........................................83
Message indicator................................................83
Oil pressure warning lamp................................83
Rear fog lamp indicator.....................................83
Seat belt reminder...............................................83
Shift indicator........................................................83
Stability control (ESP) warning lamp..........83
Start-stop indicator.............................................83
Warning Triangle...........................................193
4-door and 5-door.............................................193
Estate and vehicles with tyre repair
kit.........................................................................193
Washer Fluid Check.....................................222
Washers
See: Wipers and Washers..................................51
Washing
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................225
Waveband button.......................................258
Wheels and Tyres........................................229
General Information.........................................229
Technical Specifications.................................240
Windows and Mirrors....................................72
Windscreen Washers....................................52
Windscreen Wipers........................................51
Intermittent wipe...................................................51
Winter Tyres
See: Using Winter Tyres..................................238
Wipers and Washers......................................51
320
CG3536en
">